Dell Networking Configuration Guide for the Z9500 Switch 9.13.0.0 December 2017 Rev.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2018 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................30 Audience.............................................................................................................................................................................. 30 Conventions........................................................................................................................................................................
Allowing Access to Different Modes...................................................................................................................... 52 Applying a Privilege Level to a Username..............................................................................................................54 Applying a Privilege Level to a Terminal Line....................................................................................................... 54 Configuring Logging................................
Configuring Critical VLAN .............................................................................................................................................. 82 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile.......................................................................................................... 83 Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions........................................................................................................
Chapter 7: Bare Metal Provisioning (BMP)................................................................................. 119 Chapter 8: Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)................................................................ 120 How BFD Works...............................................................................................................................................................120 BFD Packet Format.........................................................................
Maintaining Existing AS Numbers During an AS Migration...............................................................................171 Allowing an AS Number to Appear in its Own AS Path.................................................................................... 172 Enabling Neighbor Graceful Restart......................................................................................................................173 Filtering on an AS-Path Attribute...............................................
Z9500 CoPP Implementation.......................................................................................................................................209 CoPP Example...................................................................................................................................................................211 Configure Control Plane Policing.................................................................................................................................
Propagation of DCB Information........................................................................................................................... 249 Auto-Detection and Manual Configuration of the DCBx Version..................................................................249 DCBx Example............................................................................................................................................................249 DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions..................
DHCP Client Operation with Other Features.....................................................................................................302 Configure Secure DHCP............................................................................................................................................... 303 Option 82.................................................................................................................................................................... 303 DHCP Snooping......
Generating Host-Keys................................................................................................................................................... 333 Monitoring FIPS Mode Status..................................................................................................................................... 333 Disabling FIPS Mode......................................................................................................................................................
IGMP Snooping................................................................................................................................................................363 Configuring IGMP Snooping................................................................................................................................... 363 Removing a Group-Port Association....................................................................................................................
Defining Interface Range Macros............................................................................................................................... 386 Define the Interface Range.................................................................................................................................... 386 Choosing an Interface-Range Macro...................................................................................................................
ICMP................................................................................................................................................................................... 414 Configuration Tasks for ICMP...................................................................................................................................... 414 Enabling ICMP Unreachable Messages......................................................................................................................
Configuring iSCSI Optimization................................................................................................................................... 438 Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information............................................................................................................... 440 Enable and Disable iSCSI Optimization.......................................................................................................................
LACP Basic Configuration Example............................................................................................................................ 472 Configure a LAG on ALPHA.................................................................................................................................... 472 Chapter 29: Layer 2................................................................................................................... 480 Manage the MAC Address Table.......................
Debugging LLDP............................................................................................................................................................. 508 Relevant Management Objects................................................................................................................................... 509 Chapter 31: Microsoft Network Load Balancing.......................................................................... 513 NLB Unicast and Multicast Modes...................
Modifying the Interface Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 539 Configuring an EdgePort...............................................................................................................................................540 Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change.................................................................................................... 540 MSTP Sample Configurations.......
Chapter 36: Pay As You Grow ................................................................................................... 588 Installing a License..........................................................................................................................................................588 Displaying License Information.....................................................................................................................................
Port Monitoring on VLT................................................................................................................................................ 625 Chapter 41: Private VLANs (PVLAN).......................................................................................... 628 Private VLAN Concepts................................................................................................................................................ 628 Using the Private VLAN Commands............
Displaying egress–queue Statistics...................................................................................................................... 663 Explicit Congestion Notification.................................................................................................................................. 664 ECN Packet Classification......................................................................................................................................
User Roles...................................................................................................................................................................696 AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.............................................................................................. 699 Role Accounting.........................................................................................................................................................
Creating Access and Trunk Ports......................................................................................................................... 745 Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN.......................................................................................................................745 Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag..................................................................... 745 Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports...........
Enabling an SNMP Agent to Notify Syslog Server Failure....................................................................................770 Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP....................................................................................................................... 771 Copying a Configuration File...................................................................................................................................772 Copying Configuration Files via SNMP............
Chapter 52: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)............................................................................... 800 Protocol Overview..........................................................................................................................................................800 Configure Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................................................. 800 Important Points to Remember...............
Configuring a Tunnel...................................................................................................................................................... 830 Configuring Tunnel Keepalive Settings.......................................................................................................................831 Configuring a Tunnel Interface.....................................................................................................................................
Configuring Route Leaking without Filtering Criteria........................................................................................861 Configuring Route Leaking with Filtering............................................................................................................863 Chapter 60: Virtual Link Trunking (VLT).................................................................................... 866 Overview................................................................................
Configuring a Static VLT Proxy Gateway................................................................................................................. 928 Configuring an LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway................................................................................................................928 VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology...................................................................................................................... 929 VLT Domain Configuration.......................
Verifying certificates...................................................................................................................................................... 973 Verifying Server certificates...................................................................................................................................973 Verifying Client Certificates....................................................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The Z9500 platform is available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.2(1.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
The Dell EMC Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: ● EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. ● EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
GRUB ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
Table 1.
Table 1.
TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 0/2 0/3 0/4 0/5 0/6 0/7 0/8 0/9 unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual up up up up up up up up up down down down up up up up up up DellEMC(conf)# do show version Dell EMC Rea
Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: ● To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword. ● Enter ? after a command prompt to list all of the available keywords. The output of this command is the same as the help command.
Short-Cut Key Action Combination CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word. Esc D Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the word. Command History The Dell EMC Networking OS maintains a history of previously-entered commands for each mode.
Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command. Example of the find Keyword The display command displays additional configuration information. The no-more command displays the output all at once rather than one screen at a time.
ssCron 0x0000026f confdCfgMgr 0x000003aa login 0x000000ee inetd 0x000000be rngd 0x000000a9 sh 0x00000046 sh 0x0000001c mount_mfs 0x00000017 mount_mfs 0x00000014 mount_mfs 0x00000002 sh 0x00000001 init 0x000001e5 sysmon 0x000002da login 0x00000203 vlthrtbtrly 0x000001fa mount_mfs 1070 107 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 270 27 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 0 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 1540 154 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 70 7 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 20 2 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port. Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
Accessing the System Remotely You can configure the system to access it remotely by Telnet or secure shell (SSH). ● The platform has a dedicated management port and a management routing table that is separate from the IP routing table. ● You can manage all Dell EMC Networking products in-band via the front-end data ports through interfaces assigned an IP address as well. Accessing the System Remotely Configuring the system for remote access is a three-step process, as described in the following topics: 1.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret | sha256– password} [encryption-type] password [dynamic-salt]] [privilege level] [role role-name] ○ name: Enter a text string upto 63 characters long. ○ access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. ○ nopassword: Allows you to configure an user without the password. ○ password: Allows you to configure an user with a password. ○ secret: Specify a secret string for an user.
￭ ￭ ￭ ￭ 0 is to input the password in clear text. 5 is to input a password that is already encrypted using MD5 encryption method. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another device. 7 is to input a password that is already encrypted using DES encryption method. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another device. 8 is to input a password that is already encrypted using sha256-based encryption method.
Table 3.
NOTE: When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration.
!
Upgrading Dell EMC Networking OS To upgrade Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS), refer to the Release Notes for the version you want to load on the system. You can download the release notes of your platform at http://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
SHA256 DellEMC# verify sha256 flash://file-name e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 50 Getting Started
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below. Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode. In the command, specify a level greater than the level given to a user or terminal line, then the first keyword of each command you wish to restrict.
CONFIGURATION mode privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...|| command-keyword} ● Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
vlan VLAN keyword DellEMC(conf)# interface group vlan 1 - 2 , tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,te-1/1)# no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,te-1/1)# end Applying a Privilege Level to a Username To set the user privilege level, use the following command. ● Configure a privilege level for a user. CONFIGURATION mode username username privilege level Applying a Privilege Level to a Terminal Line To set a privilege level for a terminal line, use the following command.
● Clearing Audit Logs Enabling Audit and Security Logs You enable audit and security logs to monitor configuration changes or determine if these changes affect the operation of the system in the network. You log audit and security events to a system log server, using the logging extended command in CONFIGURATION mode. Audit Logs The audit log contains configuration events and information. The types of information in this log consist of the following: ● User logins to the switch.
May 12 12:20:42: DellEMC#: %CLI-6-service timestamps log datetime by admin from vty0 (10.14.1.98) For information about the logging extended command, see Enabling Audit and Security Logs Example of the show logging Command for Security DellEMC#show logging Jun 10 04:23:40: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user admin on line vty0 ( 10.14.1.91 ) Clearing Audit Logs To clear audit logs, use the clear logging auditlog command in Exec mode.
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1. On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2. On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
Track Login Activity Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to track the login activity of users and view the successful and unsuccessful login events. When you log in using the console or VTY line, the system displays the last successful login details of the current user and the number of unsuccessful login attempts since your last successful login to the system, and whether the current user’s permissions have changed since the last login.
Example of the show login statistics all command The show login statistics all command displays the successful and failed login details of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. DellEMC#show login statistics all -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 08:54:28 UTC Wed Mar 23 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user login-id command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user admin There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 12 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics successful-attempts command. DellEMC#show login statistics successful-attempts There were 4 successful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s).
Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'. Login: admin Password: Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 Clear existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: When you try to create more than the permitted number of sessions, the following message appears, prompting you to close one of the existing sessions. If you close any of the existing sessions, you are allowed to login. $ telnet 10.11.178.17 Trying 10.11.178.17... Connected to 10.11.178.17.
● Disable all logging except on the console. CONFIGURATION mode no logging on ● Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer ● Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor ● Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.
%CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 5 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 8 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 10 present %CHMGR-5-CARDDETECTED: Line card 12 present %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 0 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 1 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 2 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 3 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 4 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 5 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 6 %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 7 %TSM-6-SFM_SWITCHFAB_STATE: Switch Fabric: UP %TSM-6-SFM_DISCOVERY
To view the logging buffer and configuration, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration. To view the logging configuration, use the show running-config logging command in privilege mode, as shown in the example for Configure a UNIX Logging Facility Level. Configuring a UNIX Logging Facility Level You can save system log messages with a UNIX system logging facility.
Synchronizing Log Messages You can configure Dell EMC Networking OS to filter and consolidate the system messages for a specific line by synchronizing the message output. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level appear. This feature works on the terminal and console connections available on the system. 1. Enter LINE mode.
are backward-compatible and do not affect existing behavior; meaning, you can still use the source-interface command to communicate with a particular interface even if no VRF is configured on that interface. For more information about FTP, refer to RFC 959, File Transfer Protocol. NOTE: To transmit large files, Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring the switch as an FTP server.
● Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For a a a a a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
seq 5 permit host 10.11.0.1 DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#line vty 0 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#show config line vty 0 access-class myvtyacl DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended testdeny seq 10 deny ip 30.1.1.
In the following example, VTY lines 0-2 use a single authentication method, line.
Exit character is '^]'. Login: Login: admin Password: DellEMC>exit DellEMC#telnet 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201 Trying 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201... Connected to 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201. Exit character is '^]'. FreeBSD/i386 (freebsd2.force10networks.com) (ttyp1) login: admin DellEMC# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell EMC Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time.
Recovering from a Forgotten Password on the Z9000 System If you configure authentication for the console and you exit out of EXEC mode or your console session times out, you are prompted for a password to re-enter. If you forget your password, use the following commands. 1. Log onto the system using the console. 2. Power-cycle the chassis by disconnecting and.then reconnecting the power cord. 3. Press Esc when prompted to abort the boot process.
1. Log onto the system using the console. 2. Power-cycle the chassis by disconnecting and then reconnecting the power cord. 3. During bootup, press Esc when prompted to abort the boot process. You enter Boot-Line Interface (BLI) mode at the BOOT_USER# prompt. 4. At the BLI prompt, set the system parameter to ignore the startup configuration and reload the system: BOOT_USER# ignore startup-config BOOT_USER# reload NOTE: You must manually enter each CLI command.
Restoring the Factory Default Settings Restoring the factory-default settings deletes the existing NVRAM settings, startup configuration, and all configured settings such as, stacking or fanout. To restore the factory default settings, use the restore factory-defaults {clear-all | nvram} command in EXEC Privilege mode. CAUTION: There is no undo for this command. Important Points to Remember ● When you restore all the units in a stack, these units are placed in standalone mode.
Important Points to Remember ● The Chassis remains in boot prompt if none of the partitions contain valid images. ● To enable TFTP boot after restoring factory default settings, you must stop the boot process in BLI. ● The tftpboot command does not work after you perform a reset bootvar because the management IP address, network mask, and gateway IP address are all reset to NULL. In case the system fails to reload the image from a flash partition, follow these steps: 1.
show reset-reason [stack-unit {unit-number | all}] Enter the stack-unit keyword and the stack unit number to view the reason for the last system reboot for that stack unit. Enter the stack-unit keyword and the keyword all to view the reason for the last system reboot of all stack units in the stack.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
● The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. ● The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network. It translates and forwards requests and responses between the authentication server and the supplicant.
Figure 5. EAP Port-Authentication EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
Configuring 802.1X Configuring 802.1X on a port is a one-step process. For more information, refer to Enabling 802.1X. Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port Re-Authenticating a Port Configuring Timeouts Configuring a Guest VLAN Configuring an Authentication-Fail VLAN Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports 802.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode.
no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! DellEMC# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. DellEMC#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
Configuring the Static MAB and MAB Profile Enable MAB (mac-auth-bypass) before using the dot1x static-mab command to enable static mab. To enable static MAB and configure a static MAB profile, use the following commands. ● Configure static MAB and static MAB profile on dot1x interface. INTERFACE mode dot1x static-mab profile profile-name Eenter a name to configure the static MAB profile name. The profile name length is limited to a maximum of 32 characters.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x critical-vlan 300 no shutdown DellEMC#show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 2/1 802.
NOTE: There are several reasons why the supplicant might fail to respond; for example, the supplicant might have been booting when the request arrived or there might be a physical layer problem. To configure re-transmissions, use the following commands. ● Configure the amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) The default is 30.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Initialize Initialize Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port The 802.1X ports can be placed into any of the three states: ● ForceAuthorized — an authorized state. A device connected to this port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process, but is allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is same as disabling 802.1X on the port. ● ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state.
The range is from 1 to 31536000. The default is 3600. ● Configure the maximum number of times the supplicant can be re-authenticated. INTERFACE mode dot1x reauth-max number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The bold lines show that re-authentication is enabled and the new maximum and re-authentication time period. DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)#dot1x reauthentication interval 7200 DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)#dot1x reauth-max 10 DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1)#do show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 802.
Port Control: FORCE_AUTHORIZED Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED Re-Authentication: Disable Untagged VLAN id: None Guest VLAN: Disable Guest VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 15 seconds Server Timeout: 15 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do af
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
● If a port is already forwarding on the Guest VLAN when 802.1X is enabled, the port is moved out of the Guest VLAN and the authentication process begins. Configuring a Guest VLAN If the supplicant does not respond within a determined amount of time ([reauth-max + 1] * tx-period, the system assumes that the host does not have 802.1X capability and the port is placed in the Guest VLAN. NOTE: For more information about configuring timeouts, refer to Configuring Timeouts.
Example of Viewing Configured Authentication 802.
6 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
• • • • • • IP Prefix Lists ACL Resequencing Route Maps Important Points to Remember Configuring UDF ACL Configuring IP Mirror Access Group IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking switch/routers, you can create two different types of IP ACLs: standard or extended. A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● standard ACL filters packets based on the source IP packet.
To determine whether sufficient ACL CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use this command. To verify the actual CAM space required, create a class map with all the required ACL rules, then execute the test cam-usage command in Privilege mode. The following example shows the output when executing this command. The status column indicates whether you can enable the policy.
ACLs acl1 and acl2 have overlapping rules because the address range 20.1.1.0/24 is within 20.0.0.0/8. Therefore (without the keyword order), packets within the range 20.1.1.0/24 match positive against cmap1 and are buffered in queue 7, though you intended for these packets to match positive against cmap2 and be buffered in queue 4. In cases where class-maps with overlapping ACL rules are applied to different queues, use the order keyword to specify the order in which you want to apply ACL rules.
DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any 10.1.1.1/32 fragments DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl) To deny the second/subsequent fragments, use the same rules in a different order. These ACLs deny all second and subsequent fragments with destination IP 10.1.1.1 but permit the first fragment and non-fragmented packets with destination IP 10.1.1.1. Example of Denying Second and Subsequent Fragments DellEMC(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any 10.1.1.
Configure a Standard IP ACL To configure an ACL, use commands in IP ACCESS LIST mode and INTERFACE mode. For a complete list of all the commands related to IP ACLs, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. To set up extended ACLs, refer to Configure an Extended IP ACL. A standard IP ACL uses the source IP address as its match criterion. 1. Enter IP ACCESS LIST mode by naming a standard IP access list. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard access-listname 2.
ip access-list standard access-list-name 2. Configure a drop or forward IP ACL filter. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
Configure Filters, TCP Packets To create a filter for TCP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for TCP packets.
{deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The following example shows an extended IP ACL in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
NOTE: CAM optimization applies only when you use an ACL VLAN group; it does not apply if you apply an ACL on individual VLANs. Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN Groups Keep the following points in mind when you configure ACL VLAN groups: ● The VLAN member interfaces, on which the ACL in an ACL VLAN group is applied, function as restricted interfaces. The ACL VLAN group name identifies the group of VLANs on which hierarchical filtering is performed. ● You can add only one ACL to an interface at a time.
5. Verify the currently configured ACL VLAN groups on the switch.
ip access-group access-list-name {in} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-range | vrf vrf-range] [layer3] NOTE: The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. 4. Apply rules to the new ACL. INTERFACE mode ip access-list [standard | extended] name To view which IP ACL is applied to an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode, or use the show running-config command in EXEC mode.
To restrict egress traffic, use an egress ACL. For example, when a denial of service (DOS) attack traffic is isolated to a specific interface, you can apply an egress ACL to block the flow from the exiting the box, thus protecting downstream devices. To create an egress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows viewing the configuration, applying rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list.
permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ipaddress} count [monitor [session-id]] Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) hellos and internet group management protocol (IGMP) packets are not affected when you enable egress ACL filtering for CPU traffic. Packets sent by the CPU with the source address as the VRRP virtual IP address have the interface MAC address instead of VRRP virtual MAC address.
● Use a prefix list for route redistribution For a complete listing of all commands related to prefix lists, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1. Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action.
The example shows a prefix list in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software. The filters were assigned sequence numbers based on the order in which they were configured (for example, the first filter was given the lowest sequence number). The show config command in PREFIX LIST mode displays two filters with the sequence numbers 5 and 10. DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#permit 123.23.0.0 /16 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)#deny 133.24.56.
CONFIGURATION mode router rip ● Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes. You can specify an interface. If you enter the name of a nonexistent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-RIP mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] ● Apply a configured prefix list to outgoing routes. You can specify an interface or type of route. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded.
You can resequence IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs, prefixes, and MAC ACLs. No CAM writes happen as a result of resequencing, so there is no packet loss; the behavior is similar Hot-lock ACLs. NOTE: ACL resequencing does not affect the rules, remarks, or order in which they are applied. Resequencing merely renumbers the rules so that you can place new rules within the list as needed. Table 5. ACL Resequencing Rules Resquencing Rules Before Resequencing: seq 5 permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 6 permit any host 1.1.1.
seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 12 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 Remarks that do not have a corresponding rule are incremented as a rule. These two mechanisms allow remarks to retain their original position in the list. The following example shows remark 10 corresponding to rule 10 and as such, they have the same number before and after the command is entered. Remark 4 is incremented as a rule, and all rules have retained their original positions.
Configuration Task List for Route Maps Configure route maps in ROUTE-MAP mode and apply the maps in various commands in ROUTER RIP and ROUTER OSPF modes. The following list includes the configuration tasks for route maps, as described in the following sections.
Match clauses: interface Loopback 23 Set clauses: tag 3444 DellEMC# To delete a route map, use the no route-map map-name command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure Route Map Filters Within ROUTE-MAP mode, there are match and set commands. ● match commands search for a certain criterion in the routes. ● set commands change the characteristics of routes, either adding something or specifying a level.
match community community-list-name [exact] ● Match routes whose next hop is a specific interface. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match interface interface The parameters are: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For For a a a a a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
set as-path prepend as-number [... as-number] ● Generate a tag to be added to redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set automatic-tag ● Specify an OSPF area or ISIS level for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area} ● Specify a value for the BGP route’s LOCAL_PREF attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set local-preference value ● Specify a value for redistributed routes.
Example of Calling a Route Map to Redistribute Specified Routes router ospf 34 default-information originate metric-type 1 redistribute static metric 20 metric-type 2 tag 0 route-map staticospf ! route-map staticospf permit 10 match interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 match metric 255 set level backbone Configure a Route Map for Route Tagging One method for identifying routes from different routing protocols is to assign a tag to routes from that protocol.
CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number [vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number] ecfmacl number [nlbclusteracl number] ipv4pbr number }openflow number | fcoe number} [ipv4udfenable] [iscsioptacl number] [vrfv4acl number] DellEMC(conf)#cam-acl l2acl 1 ipv4acl 8 ipv6acl 2 ipv4qos 0 l2qos 2 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 ipv4udfenable 3. View the currently configured CAM allocation.
IpMacAcl : VmanQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- linecard 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 4 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 2 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 4. Create a UDF packet format in the UDF TCAM table.
show config DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam)#show config ! udf-tcam ipnip seq 1 match l2ethertype ipv4 ipprotocol 4 vlantag any DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam)# 9. Create a UDF qualifier to assign values to UDF IDs. CONFIGURATION-UDF TCAM mode udf-qualifier-value name DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam)# udf-qualifier-value ipnip_val1 10. Assign a value to a UDF ID. CONFIGURATION-UDF-Qualifier-Value Profile mode udf-id 1-12 value mask DellEMC(conf-udf-tcam-qual-val)#udf-id 1 aa ff 11.
ip access-list {standard | extended} access-list-name Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard test 4. Configure a filter to permit the IP packets. CONFIGURATION—STANDARD—ACCESS—LIST mode CONFIGURATION—EXTENDED—ACCESS—LIST mode permit {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [count [bytes]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [monitor [session-id]] [no-drop] Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip any any count monitor 65535 5. Associate the IP access list to an interface.
7 Bare Metal Provisioning (BMP) Support for BMP on the S6000 Switch Starting with Dell Networking OS Release 9.3(0.0), BMP 3.1 is supported on the S6000 platform. For details about the commands and configuration procedures of BMP 3.1, refer the Open Automation Guide. Enhanced Behavior of the stop bmp Command The stop bmp command behaves as follows: ● While Dell Networking OS image upgrade is in progress, it aborts the BMP process after the Dell Networking OS image is upgraded.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface. Desired Min TX Interval The minimum rate at which the local system would like to send control packets to the remote system.
State Description Init The local system is communicating. Up Both systems are exchanging control packets. The session is declared down if: ● A control packet is not received within the detection time. ● Sufficient echo packets are lost. ● Demand mode is active and a control packet is not received in response to a poll packet. BFD Three-Way Handshake A three-way handshake must take place between the systems that participate in the BFD session.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
● Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Static Routes BFD offers systems a link state detection mechanism for static routes. With BFD, systems are notified to remove static routes from the routing table as soon as the link state change occurs, rather than waiting until packets fail to reach their next hop. Configuring BFD for static routes is a three-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Configure static routes on both routers on the system (either local or remote). 3.
To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Nondefault VRF You can also create nondefault VRFs and establish sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. To establish a BFD session for nondefault VRFs, use the following command. ● Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
* 23.1.1.1 23.1.1.2 Vl 300 Up 200 200 3 2 R * 33.1.1.1 33.1.1.2 Vl 301 Up 200 200 3 2 R Establishing Static Route Sessions on Specific Neighbors You can selectively enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors based on a destination prefix-list. When you establish a BFD session using the ip route bfd command, all the next-hop neighbors in the static route become part of the BFD session. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS release 9.11.0.
ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down packet is sent to all neighbors on the remote systems, and those neighbors change to the Down state. To disable BFD for static routes, use the following command. ● Disable BFD for static routes.
LocalAddr * 11::1 RemoteAddr 11::2 Interface Te 1/1 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Up 200 200 3 R To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. Establishing Sessions for IPv6 Static Routes for Nondefault VRF You can also create nondefault VRFs and establish sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. To establish a BFD session for nondefault VRFs, use the following command.
LocalAddr Clients * 13::1 R RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult VRF 13::2 Te 1/1 Up 200 200 3 2 * 23::1 R 23::2 Vl 300 Up 200 200 3 2 * 33::1 R 33::2 Vl 301 Up 200 200 3 2 Changing IPv6 Static Route Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all static routes.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Enable BFD globally.
The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 Te 2/2 Up 100 100 3 O Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, follow this procedure: ● Enable BFD globally.
* * * * 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.139 Te Te Te Te 1/42 1/43 1/38 1/42 Up Up Up Up 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 3 3 3 3 VT VT VT VT DellEMC# show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 10.1.3.2 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:02:15:0e Remote Addr: 10.1.3.
ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode no bfd all-neighbors ● Disable BFD sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors.
O3 DellEMC# Establishing BFD Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, use the following procedure: ● Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable ● Establish sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors in a specific VRF. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode bfd all-neighbors ● Establish sessions with the OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface in a specific VRF.
511 O3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 101 Up 150 150 3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 102 Up 150 150 3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 DellEMC# fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 103 Up 150 150 3 Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: desired tx interval, required min rx interval, detection multiplier, and system role.
Related Configuration Tasks ● Changing IS-IS Session Parameters ● Disabling BFD for IS-IS Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. ● Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors.
C I O R - CLI - ISIS - OSPF - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
Figure 15. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: ● By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). ● By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 5. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 6.
2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Specify the address family as IPv4. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name 4. Add an IPv4 BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 5. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 6.
Disabling BFD for BGP You can disable BFD for BGP. To disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the first command. To remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the second command. The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd all-neighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. ● Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
V - VRRP LocalAddr * 1.1.1.3 * 2.2.2.3 * 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 Interface Te 6/1 Te 6/2 Te 6/3 State Up Up Up Rx-int 200 200 200 Tx-int 200 200 200 Mult 3 3 3 Clients B B B The following example shows viewing BFD neighbors with full detail. The bold lines show the BFD session parameters: TX (packet transmission), RX (packet reception), and multiplier (maximum number of missed packets).
3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 0 0 0 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor.
BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM). BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in VRRP.
vrrp bfd all-neighbors Establishing VRRP Sessions on VRRP Neighbors The master router does not care about the state of the backup router, so it does not participate in any VRRP BFD sessions. VRRP BFD sessions on the backup router cannot change to the UP state. Configure the master router to establish an individual VRRP session the backup router. To establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor, use the following command. ● Establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor.
INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the example in Verifying BFD Sessions with BGP Neighbors Using the show bfd neighbors command example in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down.
9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
Figure 17. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network. Updates traveling through the network and returning to the same node are easily detected and discarded.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
1. Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2. Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B. 3.
Figure 20. BGP Best Path Selection Best Path Selection Details 1. Prefer the path with the largest WEIGHT attribute. 2. Prefer the path with the largest LOCAL_PREF attribute. 3. Prefer the path that was locally Originated via a network command, redistribute command or aggregateaddress command. a. Routes originated with the Originated via a network or redistribute commands are preferred over routes originated with the aggregate-address command. 4.
After a number of best paths is determined, this selection criteria is applied to group’s best to determine the ultimate best path. In non-deterministic mode (the bgp non-deterministic-med command is applied), paths are compared in the order in which they arrive. This method can lead to Dell EMC Networking OS choosing different best paths from a set of paths, depending on the order in which they were received from the neighbors because MED may or may not get compared between the adjacent paths.
Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path. For this example, assume the MED is the only attribute applied.
Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network *> 7.0.0.0/29 *> 7.0.0.0/30 *> 9.2.0.0/16 Next Hop 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 Metric 0 0 10 LocPrf 0 0 0 Weight 18508 18508 18508 Path ? ? 701 i AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through.
NOTE: It is possible to configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast network layer reachability information (NLRI), but you cannot connect multiprotocol BGP with BGP. Therefore, you cannot redistribute multiprotocol BGP routes into BGP. Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath router-id ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs). The 4-Byte support is advertised as a new BGP capability (4-BYTE-AS) in the OPEN message.
Dynamic AS Number Notation Application Dell EMC Networking OS applies the ASN notation type change dynamically to the running-config statements. When you apply or change an notation, the type selected is reflected immediately in the running-configuration and the show commands (refer to the following two examples).
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress. When migrating one AS to another, perhaps combining ASs, an eBGP network may lose its routing to an iBGP if the ASN changes.
BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website. NOTE: For the Force10-BGP4-V2-MIB and other MIB documentation, refer to the Dell iSupport web page.
● If a received update route matches with a local prefix, then that route is discarded. This behavior results from an incorrect BGP configuration. To overcome this issue, you can trigger a route refresh after you properly configure BGP. ● If all the IP interfaces are in non-default VRFs, then you must have at least one interface in default VRF in order to configure a routing process that works with non-default VRFs. Traps (notifications) specified in the BGP4 MIB draft
Table 7. BGP Default Values (continued) Item Default holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Enabling BGP By default, BGP is not enabled on the system. Dell EMC Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To establish BGP sessions and route traffic, configure at least one BGP neighbor or peer. In BGP, routers with an established TCP connection are called neighbors or peers.
3. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown NOTE: When you change the configuration of a BGP neighbor, always reset it by entering the clear ip bgp * command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, enter show config in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view the BGP status, use the show ip bgp summary command in EXEC Privilege mode.
The third line of the show ip bgp neighbors output contains the BGP State. If anything other than ESTABLISHED is listed, the neighbor is not exchanging information and routes. For more information about using the show ip bgp neighbors command, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. The following example shows the show ip bgp neighbors command output. DellEMC#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 10.114.8.
neighbor 192.168.12.2 no shutdown DellEMC# Configuring AS4 Number Representations Enable one type of AS number representation: ASPLAIN, ASDOT+, or ASDOT. Term Description ASPLAIN Default method for AS number representation. With the ASPLAIN notation, a 32–bit binary AS number is translated into a decimal value. ASDOT+ A representation splits the full binary 4-byte AS number into two words of 16 bits separated by a decimal point (.): ..
neighbor 172.30.1.250 password 7 5ab3eb9a15ed02ff4f0dfd4500d6017873cfd9a267c04957 neighbor 172.30.1.250 no shutdown 5332332 9911991 65057 18508 12182 7018 46164 i The following example shows the bgp asnotation asdot+ command output. DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 bgp asnotation asdot+ bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 remote-as 18508 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 neighbor 172.30.1.250 route-map rmap1 in neighbor 172.30.
To add an internal BGP (IBGP) neighbor, configure the as-number parameter with the same BGP as-number configured in the router bgp as-number command. After you create a peer group, you can use any of the commands beginning with the keyword neighbor to configure that peer group. When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is zanzibar, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 26 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 10.68.160.1 10.68.161.1 10.68.162.1 10.68.163.1 10.68.164.1 10.68.165.1 10.68.166.1 10.68.167.1 10.68.168.1 10.68.169.1 10.68.170.1 10.68.171.1 10.68.172.1 10.68.173.1 10.68.174.1 10.68.175.1 10.68.176.1 10.68.177.1 10.68.178.1 10.68.179.1 10.68.180.1 10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.
Sent 45 messages, 5 notifications, Received 6 updates, Sent 0 updates Route refresh request: received 0, Minimum time between advertisement Minimum time before advertisements 0 in queue sent 0 runs is 5 seconds start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0
Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message. When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell EMC Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor.
network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.10.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.12.2 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.12.
Enabling Neighbor Graceful Restart BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise, it is disabled. Graceful-restart applies to all neighbors with established adjacency. With the graceful restart feature, Dell EMC Networking OS enables the receiving/restarting mode by default. In Receiver-Only mode, graceful restart saves the advertised routes of peers that support this capability when they restart.
5. Use a configured AS-PATH ACL for route filtering and manipulation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} If you assign an non-existent or empty AS-PATH ACL, the software allows all routes. To view all BGP path attributes in the BGP database, use the show ip bgp paths command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Regular Expression Definition | (pipe) Matches characters on either side of the metacharacter; logical OR. As seen in the following example, the expressions are displayed when using the show commands. To view the AS-PATH ACL configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION AS-PATH ACL mode and the show ip as-pathaccess-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. For more information about this command and route filtering, refer to Filtering BGP Routes.
Configure the following parameters: ○ level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: Assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. ○ metric value: The value is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. ○ map-name: name of a configured route map. ● Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.
To configure an IP community list, use these commands. 1. Create a community list and enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip community-list community-list-name 2. Configure a community list by denying or permitting specific community numbers or types of community.
To set or modify an extended community attribute, use the set extcommunity {rt | soo} {ASN:NN | IPADDR:NN} command. To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION COMMUNITY-LIST or CONFIGURATION EXTCOMMUNITY LIST mode or the show ip {community-lists | extcommunity-list} command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute In addition to permitting or denying routes based on the values of the COMMUNITY attributes, you can manipulate the COMMUNITY attribute value and send the COMMUNITY attribute with the route information. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS does not send the COMMUNITY attribute. To send the COMMUNITY attribute to BGP neighbors, use the following command. ● Enable the software to send the router’s COMMUNITY attribute to the BGP neighbor or peer group specified.
*>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.0/30 *>i 6.1.0.0/16 *>i 6.2.0.0/22 *>i 6.3.0.0/18 *>i 6.4.0.0/16 *>i 6.5.0.0/19 *>i 6.8.0.0/20 *>i 6.9.0.0/20 *>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.0/21 *>i 6.151.0.0/16 --More-- 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.
3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Apply the route map to the neighbor or peer group’s incoming or outgoing routes. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Enabling Multipath By default, the software allows one path to a destination. You can enable multipath to allow up to 64 parallel paths to a destination. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow more than one path, use the following command. The show ip bgp network command includes multipath information for that network. ● Enable multiple parallel paths.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} Configure the following parameters: ● ip-address or peer-group-name: enter the neighbor’s IP address or the peer group’s name. ● prefix-list-name: enter the name of a configured prefix list. ● in: apply the prefix list to inbound routes. ● out: apply the prefix list to outbound routes. As a reminder, the following are rules concerning prefix lists: ● If the prefix list contains no filters, all routes are permitted.
{deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} Configure the following parameters: ● ip-address or peer-group-name: enter the neighbor’s IP address or the peer group’s name. ● as-path-name: enter the name of a configured AS-PATH ACL.
aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map mapname] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name] In the show ip bgp command, aggregates contain an ‘a’ in the first column (shown in bold) and routes suppressed by the aggregate contain an ‘s’ in the first column. DellEMC#show ip bgp BGP table version is 0, local router ID is 10.101.15.
● Attribute change When dampening is applied to a route, its path is described by one of the following terms: ● history entry — an entry that stores information on a downed route ● dampened path — a path that is no longer advertised ● penalized path — a path that is assigned a penalty To configure route flap dampening parameters, set dampening parameters using a route map, clear information on route dampening and return suppressed routes to active state, view statistics on route flapping, or change the path
NOTE: When you change the best path selection method, path selection for existing paths remains unchanged until you reset it by entering the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following example shows how to configure values to reuse or restart a route.
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode timers bgp keepalive holdtime ○ keepalive: the range is from 1 to 65535. Time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The default is 60 seconds. ○ holdtime: the range is from 3 to 65536. Time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive message and declaring the router dead. The default is 180 seconds.
Enabling or disabling BGP neighbors You can enable or disable all the configured BGP neighbors using the shutdown all command in ROUTER BGP mode. To disable all the configured BGP neighbors: 1. Enter the router bgp mode using the following command: CONFIGURATION Mode router bgp as-number 2. In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface.
address-family-ipv6-unicast commands. Irrespective of whether the BGP neighbors are disabled earlier, the shutdown all command brings down all the configured BGP neighbors. When you issue the no shutdown all command, all the BGP neighbor neighbors are enabled. However, when you re-enable all the BGP neighbors in global configuration mode, only the neighbors that were not in disabled state before the global shutdown come up.
● If the corresponding capability is received in the peer’s Open message, BGP marks the peer as supporting the AFI/SAFI. ● When exchanging updates with the peer, BGP sends and receives IPv4 multicast routes if the peer is marked as supporting that AFI/SAFI. ● Exchange of IPv4 multicast route information occurs through the use of two new attributes called MP_REACH_NLRI and MP_UNREACH_NLRI, for feasible and withdrawn routes, respectively.
● View information about local BGP state changes and other BGP events. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out] ● View information about BGP KEEPALIVE messages. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalive [in | out] ● View information about BGP notifications received from or sent to neighbors.
For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), 0 withdrawn by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, 0 withdrawn from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known attribute Notification History 'UPDATE error/Missing well-known attr' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:26:02 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00160303 03010000 Last notifi
00000000 PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:50 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[4] : len 19, captured 00:34:20 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] The following example shows how to view space requirements for storing all the PDUs. With full internet feed (205K) captured, approximately 11.8MB is required to store all of the PDUs.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/21 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.21/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#int te 1/31 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#ip address 10.0.3.
router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192 168 128 3 no shutdown Example of Enabling BGP (Router 2) R2# conf R2(conf)#int loop 0 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.2/24 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.
R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.0/24 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.
Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:00:57, due to user reset Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00150306 00000000 Local host: 192.168.128.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 192.168.128.2, Foreign port: 65464 BGP neighbor is 192.168.128.
R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 peer-group BBB R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer-group BBB R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# R3(conf-router_bgp)#end R3#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell EMC Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies.On a line card, there are one or two CAM (Dual-CAM) modules per port-pipe.
Table 8. Default Cam Allocation Settings (continued) CAM Allocation Setting iscsiOptAcl 0 ipv4pbr 0 vrfv4Acl 0 Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 256 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 128 entries. Select 2 to configure 256 entries.
2. Enter the number of FP blocks for each region. EXEC Privilege mode cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number ecfmacl number nlbcluster number ipv4pbr number openflow number | fcoe number NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3. Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot.
Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos EcfmAcl Openflow : : : : : : : : : 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- linecard 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 Openflow : 0 -- linecard 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 Openflow : 0 -- linecard 2 -Current Settings(in
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 | | | | | --More-- | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 | | | | | IN-L3 ACL IN-L3 ECMP GRP IN-L3 FIB IN-L3-SysFlow IN-L3-TrcList IN-L3-McastFib IN-L3-Qos IN-L3-PBR IN-V6 ACL IN-V6 FIB IN-V6-SysFlow IN-V6-McastFib OUT-L2 ACL OUT-L3 ACL OUT-V6 ACL IN-L2 ACL IN-L2 FIB IN-L3 ACL IN-L3 FIB IN-L3-SysFlow | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 12288 | 262144| 262141 | 2878 | 1024 | 9215 | 8192 | 1024 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1024 | 1024 | 0 | 320 | 32768 | 12288 | 262141 | 2878 | 2 0 14 4
Consider if the last CAM threshold was set to 90 percent and now you re-configure the CAM threshold to 80. And, if the current CAM usage is 85 percent, then the system displays the syslog message saying that the CAM usage is above the configured CAM threshold value. Table 10.
Applications for CAM Profiling The following describes link aggregation group (LAG) hashing. LAG Hashing Dell Networking OS includes a CAM profile and microcode that treats MPLS packets as non-IP packets. Normally, switching and LAG hashing is based on source and destination MAC addresses. Alternatively, you can base LAG hashing for MPLS packets on source and destination IP addresses. This type of hashing is allowed for MPLS packets with five labels or less.
2. Display the hardware forwarding table mode in the current boot and in the next boot.
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Topics: • • • • Z9500 CoPP Implementation CoPP Example Configure Control Plane Policing Troubleshooting CoPP Operation Z9500 CoPP Implementation The Z9500 control plane consists of multi-core CPUs with internal queues for handling packets destined to the Route Processor, Control Processor, and line-card CPUs. On the Z9500, CoPP is implemented as a distributed architecture.
User-configured ACLs that filter protocol traffic flows to the control plane are automatically applied or disabled as the corresponding protocol is enabled or disabled in the system. In this way, control packets from disabled protocols never reach the control plane. Protocol-based Control Plane Policing To configure a protocol-based CoPP policy, you create an extended ACL rule for the protocol and specify the rate limit in a QoS policy.
Table 13. Default Rate Limit for Line-Card queues (continued) 16 — 1 17 — 1 18 — 1 19 — 1 20 Source miss, Station move, Trace flow 600 21 BFD 7000 22 HyperPull, FRRP 800 23 sFlow 5000 NOTE: In the line-card CPU, some queues have no protocol traffic mapped to them. These rows appear blank in the preceding table. CoPP Example The illustrations in this section show the benefit of using CoPP compared to not using CoPP on a switch.
Figure 28. CoPP Versus Non-CoPP Operation NOTE: On the Z9500, CoPP does not convert the input rate of control-plane traffic from kilobits per second (kbps) to packets per second (pps) as on other Dell Networking switches. On other switch, CoPP converts the input kilobit-per-second rate to a packet-per-second rate, assuming 64 bytes as the average packet size. CoPP then applies the packet-per-second rate to the appropriate queue. On these switches, 1 kbps is approximately equal to 2 pps.
1. Create a Layer 2 extended ACL for control-plane traffic policing for a particular protocol. CONFIGURATION mode mac access-list extended name cpu-qos permit {arp | frrp | gvrp | isis | lacp | lldp | stp} 2. Create a Layer 3 extended ACL for control-plane traffic policing for a particular protocol. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended name cpu-qos permit {bgp | dhcp | dhcp-relay | ftp | icmp | igmp | msdp | ntp | ospf | pim | ip | ssh | telnet | vrrp} 3.
The following example shows creating the QoS input policy.
Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit Example of Creating a QoS Rate-Limiting Input Policy Dell(conf)#qos-policy-in rate_limit_200k cpu-qos Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#rate-police 200 40 peak 500 40 Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#qos-policy-in rate_limit_400k cpu-qos Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#rate-police 400 50 peak 600 50 Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#qos-policy-in rate_limit_500k cpu-qos Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#rate-poli
policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue queue-number qos-policy name On the Z9500, the range of queue-number values is from 0 to 23. The twenty-four control–plane queues are divided into groups of eight queues for the Route Processor, Control Processor, and line-card CPUs as follows: ● Queues 0 to 7 process packets destined to the Control Processor CPU . ● Queues 8 to 15 process packets destined to the Route Processor CPU. ● Queues 16 to 23 process packets destined to the line-card CPU. 3.
Example of Applying a Queue-Based Rate Limit to Control Plane Traffic Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy Displaying CoPP Configuration The CLI provides show commands to display the protocol traffic assigned to each control-plane queue and the current rate-limit applied to each queue. Other show commands display statistical information for trouble shooting CoPP operation.
TCP (TELNET) VRRP any any 23 any _ _ Q4 Q15 CP RP 400 400 To view the queue mapping for the MAC protocols, use the show mac protocol-queue-mapping command.
v6 BGP v6 OSPF v6 VRRP MLD v6 MULTICAST CATCH ALL v6 ICMP NA v6 ICMP RA v6 ICMP NS v6 ICMP RS v6 ICMP BGP OSPF RIP VRRP ICMP IGMP PIM MSDP BFD 802.
NOTE: You must manually enable the collection of CPU traffic statistics with the debug cpu-traffic-stats command before the statistics display in show cpu-traffic-stats output. It is recommended that when you finish CoPP troubleshooting, you disable the collection of CPU traffic statistics by entering the no debug cpu-trafficstats command. Viewing CPU Traffic Statistics To view the statistics collected on CPU traffic, use the show cpu-traffic-stats [cp | rp | linecard {0–2} |all] command.
Stage InPorts DATA=0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000222222222222 MASK=0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000222222222223 DstMac Offset: 88 Width: 48 DATA=0x00000180 c200000e MASK=0x0000ffff ffffffff action={act=DropPrecedence, param0=1(0x1), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} action={act=Drop, param0=0(0), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=1(0x1), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=1(0x1), param1=2
--More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP Entry ########################## --More-######################## FP Entry --More-######################## FP
OSPF 0 v6 OSPF 0 RIP 0 VRRP 0 v6 VRRP 0 IGMP 0 PIM 0 NTP 0 MULTICAST CATCH ALL 0 v6 MULTICAST CATCH ALL 0 DHCP RELAY/DHCP 0 v6 ICMP NA/v6 ICMP RA 0 v6 ICMP NS/v6 ICMP RS 0 v6 ICMP/ICMP 0 MLD 0 MSDP 0 FTP/TELNET/SSH/L3 LOCAL TERMINATED 0 L3 UNKNOWN/UNRESOLVED ARP 0 iSCSI 0 FCoE 0 SFLOW 0 VLT CTRL/VLT IPM PDU 0 HYPERPULL 0 OPENFLOW 0 L2 DST HIT/BROADCAST 0 VLT TTL1/TRACEFLOW/TTL0/ 0 STATION MOVE/TTL1/IP OPTION/L3 MTU FAIL/SOURCE MISS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VLT TTL1 HYPERPULL OPENFLOW FEFD TRACEFLOW FCoE SFLOW L3 LOCAL TERMINATED L3 UNKNOWN/UNRESOLVED ARP L2 DST HIT/BROADCAST MULTICAST CATCH ALL v6 MULTICAST CATCH ALL L3 HEADER ERROR/TTL0 IP OPTION/TTL1 L3 MTU FAIL SOURCE MISS STATION MOVE TX ENTRY DROP ENTRY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12600 0 0 0 0 0 887040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12600 0 0 0 0 0 887040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 To clear the per-protocol counters of rate-limited control-plane traffic at the aggregated (switch) or line card and po
Q13 Q14 Q15 Q16 Q17 Q18 Q19 Q20 Q21 Q22 Q23 0 1160300 8515864 0 0 0 0 0 0 1157004 0 0 1160300 8515864 0 0 0 0 0 0 1157004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 To clear the per-queue counters of rate-limited traffic at the aggregated (switch) or individual queue level, use the clear control-traffic queue {all | queue-id queue-number} counters command; for example: Dell#clear control-traffic queue queue-id 2 counters Dell# Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 225
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks. NOTE: Data center bridging (DCB) is enabled in Z9500 switch.
DCB results in reduced operational cost, simplified management, and easy scalability by avoiding the need to deploy separate application-specific networks. For example, instead of deploying an Ethernet network for LAN traffic, include additional storage area networks (SANs) to ensure lossless Fibre Channel traffic, and a separate InfiniBand network for high-performance inter-processor computing within server clusters, only one DCB-enabled network is required in a data center.
Figure 29. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: ● FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. ● iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: ● PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
Figure 30. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 14. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.0 - 15.7 is strict priority group.. Group bandwidth Percentage of available bandwidth allocated to a priority group.
Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 31. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Priority-Based Flow Control In a data center network, priority-based flow control (PFC) manages large bursts of one traffic type in multiprotocol links so that it does not affect other traffic types and no frames are lost due to congestion. When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority, it sends a pause frame for the 802.
● FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. ● iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: ● PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only four lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) storage traffic. Configure the same lossless queues on all ports.
Table 15. ETS Traffic Groupings (continued) Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.0 - 15.7 is strict priority group.. Group bandwidth Percentage of available bandwidth allocated to a priority group. Group transmission selection algorithm (TSA) Type of queue scheduling a priority group uses. In Dell EMC Networking OS, ETS is implemented as follows: ● ETS supports groups of 802.
DCB Maps and its Attributes This topic contains the following sections that describe how to configure a DCB map, apply the configured DCB map to a port, configure PFC without a DCB map, and configure lossless queues. DCB Map: Configuration Procedure A DCB map consists of PFC and ETS parameters. By default, PFC is not enabled on any 802.1p priority and ETS allocates equal bandwidth to each priority. To configure user-defined PFC and ETS settings, you must create a DCB map.
ETS: Equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group. To configure PFC and ETS parameters on an interface, you must specify the PFC mode, the ETS bandwidth allocation for a priority group, and the 802.1p priority-to-priority group mapping in a DCB map. No default PFC and ETS settings are applied to Ethernet interfaces. Configuring Priority-Based Flow Control Priority-Based Flow Control (PFC) provides a flow control mechanism based on the 802.
PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 1, 2 on Port B. PFC capability is enabled on priorities 3, 4 on PORT A and C. Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues.
When traffic congestion occurs, PFC sends a pause frame to a peer device with the CoS priority values of the traffic that needs to be stopped. DCBx provides the link-level exchange of PFC parameters between peer devices. PFC allows network administrators to create zero-loss links for SAN traffic that requires no-drop service, while at the same time retaining packetdrop congestion management for LAN traffic. On a switch, PFC is enabled by default on Ethernet ports (pfc mode on command).
● You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface. Applying a DCB Map on a Port When you apply a DCB map with PFC enabled on a switch interface, a memory buffer for PFC-enabled priority traffic is automatically allocated. The buffer size is allocated according to the number of PFC-enabled priorities in the assigned map. To apply a DCB map to an Ethernet port, follow these steps: Table 16.
Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface when PFC mode is disabled in a DCB map, apply the map on the interface. The configuration of no-drop queues provides flexibility for ports on which PFC is not needed, but lossless traffic should egress from the interface. Configuring no-drop queues is applicable only on the interfaces which do not need PFC.
Table 18. Configuring Lossless Queues on a Port Interface (continued) Step Task Command Command Mode The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on a port is 2. You cannot configure PFC no-drop queues on an interface on which a DCB map with PFC enabled has been applied, or which is already configured for PFC using the pfc priority command. Range: 0-3.
By default the total available buffer for PFC is 6.6 MB and when you configure dynamic ingress buffering, a minimum of least 52 KB per queue is used when all ports are congested. By default, the system enables a maximum of 1 lossless queue on the Z9500 platform. This default behavior is impacted if you modify the total buffer available for PFC or assign static buffer configurations to the individual PFC queues.
To configure the aforementioned DSCP and PFC priority values, perform the following tasks: 1. Create class-maps to group the DSCP subsets class-map match ip ! class-map match ip match-any dscp-pfc-1 dscp 0-5,10-15 match-any dscp-pfc-2 dscp 20-25,30-35 2. Associate above class-maps to Queues Queue assignment as below. Table 19. Queue Assignments Internalpriority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 Table 19.
dellNetFpStatsPe This table fetches the Allocated Min cells, Shared cells, and Headroom cells per Priority Group, the mode rPgTable in which the buffer cells are allocated — Static or Dynamic and the Used Min Cells, Shared cells and Headroom cells per Priority Group. The table fetches a value of 0 if the mode of allocation is Static and a value of 1 if the mode of allocation is Dynamic. This table lists thelinecard number, port number and priority group number.
Table 21. Dot1p to Queue Mapping (continued) Queue 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 PFC and ETS Configuration Examples This section contains examples of how to configure and apply DCB policies on an interface. Using PFC to Manage Converged Ethernet Traffic To use PFC for managing converged Ethernet traffic, use the following command: dcb-map linecard all backplane all dcb-map-name Configure Enhanced Transmission Selection ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802.
3. Configure the 802.1p priorities for the traffic on which you want to apply an ETS output policy. PRIORITY-GROUP mode priority-list value The range is from 0 to 7. The default is none. Separate priority values with a comma. Specify a priority range with a dash. For example, priority-list 3,5-7. 4. Exit priority-group configuration mode. PRIORITY-GROUP mode exit 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to configure all remaining dot1p priorities in an ETS priority group. 6.
Configuring Bandwidth Allocation for DCBx CIN After you apply an ETS output policy to an interface, if the DCBx version used in your data center network is CIN, you may need to configure a QoS output policy to overwrite the default CIN bandwidth allocation. This default setting divides the bandwidth allocated to each port queue equally between the dot1p priority traffic assigned to the queue.
Therefore, in this example, scheduling traffic to priority group 1 (mapped to one strict-priority queue) takes precedence over scheduling traffic to priority group 3 (mapped to two strict-priority queues). Applying the DCB Policies on Linecard You can apply DCB policies with PFC and ETS configurations to the linecard on a switch. To apply DCB policies on linecard, follow this step. ● Apply the DCB map on a linecard.
● Discovers DCB configuration (such as PFC and ETS) in a peer device. ● Detects DCB mis-configuration in a peer device; that is, when DCB features are not compatibly configured on a peer device and the local switch. Mis-configuration detection is feature-specific because some DCB features support asymmetric configuration. ● Reconfigures a peer device with the DCB configuration from its configuration source if the peer device is willing to accept configuration.
devices but do not accept or propagate internal or external configurations. Unlike other user-configured ports, the configuration of DCBx ports in Manual mode is saved in the running configuration. On a DCBx port in a manual role, all PFC, application priority, ETS recommend, and ETS configuration TLVs are enabled.
A newly elected configuration source propagates configuration changes received from a peer to the other auto-configuration ports. Ports receiving auto-configuration information from the configuration source ignore their current settings and use the configuration source information. Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch.
Figure 34. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: ● For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
4. Configure the DCBx port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} ● auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from autoupstream ports. ● auto-downstream: configures the port to accept the internally propagated DCB configuration from a configuration source.
● ieee-v2.5: configures a port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. NOTE: To configure the DCBx port role the interfaces use to exchange DCB information, use the DCBx port-role command in INTERFACE Configuration mode (Step 3). 4. Configure the PFC and ETS TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role.
DCBx Error Messages The following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs. LLDP_MULTIPLE_PEER_DETECTED: DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting more than one DCBx peer on the port interface. LLDP_PEER_AGE_OUT: DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx peer interface. DSM_DCBx_PEER_VERSION_CONFLICT: A local port expected to receive the IEEE, CIN, or CEE version in a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different, conflicting DCBx version.
Table 22. Displaying DCB Configurations (continued) Command Output show dcb [linecard {all | unit-number}] [sfm {all | unit-number}] Displays the data center bridging status, number of PFCenabled ports, and number of PFC-enabled queues. You can optionally specify the linecard or SFM number. The range for line card is from 0 to 3 and for SFM is from 0 to 5. show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group.
The following example shows the output of the show qos dcb-map test command. DellEMC#show qos dcb-map test ----------------------State :Complete PfcMode:ON -------------------PG:0 TSA:ETS BW:50 PFC:OFF Priorities:0 1 2 5 6 7 PG:1 TSA:ETS BW:50 Priorities:3 4 PFC:ON The following example shows the show interfaces pfc summary command. The following table describes the show interface pfc summary command fields. Table 23.
Table 23. show interface pfc summary Command Description (continued) Fields Description Application Priority TLV: Local FCOE Priority Map Priority bitmap used by local DCBx port in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs. Application Priority TLV: Local ISCSI Priority Map Priority bitmap used by local DCBx port in ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs.
Traffic 0 Input 0 Input Traffic Pkts Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Class TLV The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 24. show interface ets detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with linecard and port number. The port type can be ten gigabit or forty gigabit.
The following example shows the show linecard 2 port-set 0 backplane all ets details command.
Table 25. show interface DCBx detail Command Description (continued) Field Description DCBx Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration. The DCBx operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status. Configuration Source Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBx configuration source on the switch: true (yes) or false (no).
Layer 2 class maps You can use dot1p priorities to classify traffic in a class map and apply a service policy to an ingress port to map traffic to egress queues. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking does not recommend mapping all ingress traffic to a single queue when using PFC and ETS. However, Dell EMC Networking does recommend using Ingress traffic classification using the service-class dynamic dot1p command (honor dot1p) on all DCB-enabled interfaces.
dcb-buffer-threshold dcb-buffer-threshold 5. DCB-BUFFER-THRESHOLD mode priority 0 buffer-size 52 pause-threshold 16 resume-offset 10 shared-threshold-weight 7 6. Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profileon backplane. CONFIGURATION mode dcb-policy buffer-threshold linecard {linecard-number | all} port-set {port-pipe | all} backplane all dcb-policy-name 7. Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces.
Figure 35. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic. 1. Enabling DCB DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure DCB map and enable PFC, and ETS 3.
13 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes the debugging and diagnostics tasks that you can perform on the switch. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • Offline Diagnostics TRACE Logs Last Restart Reason show hardware Commands Environmental Monitoring Troubleshooting Packet Loss Accessing Application Core Dumps Mini Core Dumps Full Kernel Core Dumps Enabling TCP Dumps Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware.
issued. Proceed with Offline [confirm yes/no]:Y 2. Confirm offline status. EXEC Privilege mode show system brief 3. Start diagnostics on the unit. diag system unit When the tests complete, the system displays a syslog message. 00:13:17 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-LP-0.txt 00:13:19 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-LP-1.txt 00:13:20 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-LP-2.
00:10:30: 00:10:30: 00:10:30: 00:10:30: 00:10:31: %SYSTEM:CP %SYSTEM:CP %SYSTEM:CP %SYSTEM:CP %SYSTEM:CP %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Fo 1/0-44, %CHMGR-2-UNIT_DOWN: linecard 2 down - linecard offline %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 2/0 %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Fo 2/0-44, %CHMGR-2-UNIT_DOWN: CP unit down - CP unit offline Dell# show system brief System MAC : 74:86:7a:ff:70:74 Reload-Type : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Linecard Info -LinecardId Type Statu
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 drwx drwx d---rwx -rwx -rwx drwx drwx -rwx drwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx drwx -rwx 4096 4096 4096 3 91459902 6127 4096 4096 32 4096 96573311 40 5398 9716 4568 2690 6283 6479 6479 4096 21762 Apr Apr Apr Mar Apr Mar Apr Apr Mar Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar 13 13 13 06 13 06 13 13 06 13 13 30 20 22 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 2008 2008 2008 2014 2008 2014 2008 2008 2014 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2014 2014 2014 2014 201
+Fan tray[4] Sanity test PASS fanTest ..................................................... PASS Starting test: fpgaTest ...... WARNING: FPGA Version must be at least 0x1a to access the status, boot status and device id registers fpgaTest .................................................... PASS i2cTest ..................................................... PASS macPhyRegTest ............................................... PASS Starting test: pcieScanTest ......
triumphPllStatusTest ........................................ PASS Starting test: usbTest ...... -USB "/dev/rsd0d" is not plugged/mounted/formatted; test SKIPPED usbTest ..................................................... FAIL LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTIC eepromTest .................................................. PASS Starting test: fabricLinkStatusTest ......
Example of a Test Log for Line-Card CPU 0: TestReport-LP-0.txt Dell#show file flash://TestReport-LP-0.txt DELL DIAGNOSTICS-Z9500-CP00 PPID PPID Rev Service Tag Part Number Part Number Revision SW Version ------- [0] NA NA NA NA NA 9.2(1.0B2) Available free memory: 2,646,888,448 bytes LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTIC eepromTest .................................................. i2cTest ..................................................... macPhyRegTest ...............................................
qsfpPresenceTest ............................................ PASS rtcTest ..................................................... PASS sataSsdTest .................................................
LEVEL 1 DIAGNOSTIC eepromTest .................................................. i2cTest ..................................................... macPhyRegTest ............................................... Starting test: partyLinkStatusTest ...... WM0 Link Status UP partyLinkStatusTest ......................................... Starting test: portcardHiGigLinkStatusTest ......
-- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) Power Usage (W) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 up AC up 19264 290.0 0 1 up AC up 19104 288.5 0 2 up AC up 19072 288.5 0 3 up AC up 19328 324.0 Total power: 1191.
19 20 21 22 23 24 -rwx -rwx -rwx -rwx drwx -rwx 2690 6283 6479 6479 4096 21762 Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar 06 06 06 06 06 06 2014 2014 2014 2014 2014 2014 02:10:34 10:29:16 10:29:18 10:29:18 10:31:36 10:31:40 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 +00:00 BMP-intCfg TestReport-LP-0.txt <<<<< TestReport-LP-1.txt <<<<< TestReport-LP-2.txt <<<<< diag TestReport-CP-unit.txt <<<<< Example of the Results of Offline/Online Diagnostics on a Standalone Switch Dell# show file flash://TestReport-{LP-unit-id}.
+PSU[0] test PASS PSU[1] sensor[0] temperature 32.0 C PSU[1] sensor[1] temperature 29.0 C PSU[1] sensor[2] temperature 23.0 C +PSU[1] test PASS PSU[2] sensor[0] temperature 32.0 C PSU[2] sensor[1] temperature 30.0 C PSU[2] sensor[2] temperature 23.0 C +PSU[2] test PASS PSU[3] sensor[0] temperature 37.0 C PSU[3] sensor[1] temperature 30.0 C PSU[3] sensor[2] temperature 21.0 C +PSU[3] test PASS psuTest ..................................................... PASS rtcTest .........................................
+ HG Link Status Test for Fabric 5: PASSED fabricLinkStatusTest ........................................ PASS Starting test: fanTest ......
Available free memory: 2,646,888,448 bytes LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTIC eepromTest .................................................. i2cTest ..................................................... macPhyRegTest ............................................... Starting test: pcieScanTest ...... 22 PCI devices installed out of 22 pcieScanTest ................................................ portcardBcmIdTest ........................................... Starting test: portcardBoardRevisionTest ......
Example of the show diag Command Dell# show diag linecard 0 detail Diag status of linecard member 0: -------------------------------------------------------------------------linecard is currently offline. linecard alllevels diag issued at Mon Jan 20, 2014 02:33:48 AM. Current diag status : Card diags are done. Duration of execution (Total) : 1 min 9 sec. Diagnostic test results located: flash:/TestReport-LP-0.
portcardHiGigLinkStatusTest ................................. Starting test: portcardXELinkStatusTest ...... + XE Link Status Test for unit 0 (Portcard 0): PASSED + XE Link Status Test for unit 1 (Portcard 1): PASSED ERROR: Unit 2 (Portcard 2): XE 11 is DOWN + XE Link Status Test for unit 2 (Portcard 2): FAILED portcardXELinkStatusTest .................................... qsfpOpticsTest .............................................. qsfpPhyTest .................................................
show hardware Commands Use the show hardware commands to troubleshoot error conditions by displaying information about a hardware subcomponent and details from hardware-based feature tables. NOTE: Use the show hardware commands only under the guidance of the Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC). ● Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member.
internal unit port number with the port-pipe unit for the 40G (highlighted lines only) and 10G ports (all lines), refer to the following table. Table 27.
Table 27.
● Use the show environment pem command to display complete information on power supply operation. Dell#show environment pem -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) Power Usage (W) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 down AC up 1376 0.0 0 1 up AC up 18848 666.0 0 2 down AC up 1312 0.0 0 3 up AC up 18880 643.0 Total power: 1309.0 W Display Fan Status To monitor the status of fan operation, use the show environment fan command.
2 2 2 2 2 2 24 28 32 36 40 44 QSFP QSFP 40GBASE-CR4-1M Media not present Media not present Media not present 40GBASE-SR4 Media not present APF12380010GM4 or accessible or accessible or accessible 7503825H006J or accessible Yes Yes To display more detailed information about the transceiver type, wavelength, and power reception on a Z9500 port, use the show interfaces command.
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 Temperature Voltage TX1 Bias Current TX2 Bias Current TX3 Bias Current TX4 Bias Current RX1 Power RX2 Power RX3 Power RX4 Power = = = = = = = = = = 21.891C 3.314V 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mW 0.000mW 0.000mW 0.000mW Recognize an Over-Temperature Condition An alarm message is generated and displayed when an over-temperature condition on a system component occurs.
NOTE: The system software automatically shuts down the system if a critical component reaches a critical shutdown threshold. The software attempts to correct the situation by running the system and power-supply fans at their maximum prescribed levels (70% PWM for system fans, and 99% for PSU fans). If sensor’s temperature does not decrease to a non-critical level within one minute (60 seconds), the system automatically shuts down.
If the system is not able to cool down within one minute from the time the shutdown alarm is generated, a second alarm is triggered and the system shuts down immediately to avoid damaging any component due to overheating: 00:16:08: %SYSTEM:LP %CHMGR-0-TEMP_SHUTDOWN_WARN: Unit 0 a temperature sensor has exceeded its critical shutdown temperature; Unit will shutdown now. Power cycle the unit to power it on.
Total Total Total Total Total Ingress Drops IngMac Drops Mmu Drops EgMac Drops Egress Drops : : : : : 41694 0 0 0 0 Dell#show hardware linecard 2 drops unit 0 UserPort PortNumber Egress Drops 0 1 0 4 5 0 8 9 0 12 13 0 16 17 0 17 18 0 18 19 0 19 20 0 20 21 0 21 22 0 22 23 0 23 24 0 24 25 0 28 29 0 32 33 0 36 37 0 40 41 0 44 45 0 Internal 50 0 Internal 51 0 Internal 52 0 Internal 53 0 Internal 54 0 Internal 55 0 Internal 56 0 Internal 57 0 Internal 58 0 Internal 59 0 Internal 60 0 Internal 61 0 288 Ingr
Example of show hardware drops interface interface Dell#show hardware drops interface tengigabitethernet 2/1 Drops in Interface Te 2/1: --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops IBP CBP Full Drops PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on
HANSKVILLE Mib Counters: TR 64 byte frames = 3 TR 127 byte frames = 358 TR 255 byte frames = 1363 TR 511 byte frames = 1934 TR 1023 byte frames = 18 TR MAX Byte frames = 6202 TR MGV Frames = 0 Bytes Transmitted = 0 Frames Transmitted = 125183 Mcast Frames Transmitted = 0 Bcast Frames Transmitted = 4 Pause Frames Transmitted = 0 Deferred Transmits = 0 Excessive Deferred Transmits = 0 TX single collisions = 0 TX multiple collisions = 0 TX late collisions = 0 TX Excessive collisions = 0 TX total collisions = 0
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx 64 Octet Packets = 122688 65to127octets Packets = 246245 128to255octets Packets = 441 256to511octets Packets = 3816 512to1023octets Packets = 3247 1024toMaxoctets Packets = 150599 Jabbers = 0 align errors = 0 fcs errors = 0 good octets = 251640594 Drop pkts = 0 Unicast Packets = 333370 Multicast Packets = 193621 Broadcast Packets = 45 Source Address Changes = 3 Fragments = 0 Jumbo Packets = 0 Symbol Errros = 0 In Range Errors = 0 OutofRange Errors
HOL DROPS on COS0 : HOL DROPS on COS1 : HOL DROPS on COS2 : HOL DROPS on COS3 : HOL DROPS on COS4 : HOL DROPS on COS5 :
----------------------STACK TRACE START--------------0035d60c : 00274f8c : 0024e2b0 : 0024dee8 : 0024d9c4 : 002522b0 : 0026a8d0 : 0026a00c : ------------------------STACK TRACE END------------------------------------------FREE MEMORY--------------uvmexp.free = 0x2312 Full Kernel Core Dumps The system supports full core dumps for kernel crashes.
14 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
2. Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters. Multiple servers might respond to a single DHCPDISCOVER; the client might wait a period of time and then act on the most preferred offer. 3. The client broadcasts a DHCPREQUEST message in response to the offer, requesting the offered values. 4.
NOTE: If the DHCP server is on the top of rack (ToR) and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link, when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP (Bare Metal Provisioning) mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure. Configure the System to be a DHCP Server A DHCP server is a network device that has been programmed to provide network configuration parameters to clients upon request. Servers typically serve many clients, making host management much more organized and efficient.
show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address. Dell EMC Networking OS performs a IP + MAC source address validation to ensure that no client can release another clients address. This validation is a default behavior and is separate from IP+MAC source address validation.
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution Dell systems are capable of providing DHCP clients with parameters for two methods of hostname resolution—using DNS or NetBIOS WINS. Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1. Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2. Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
Debugging the DHCP Server To debug the DHCP server, use the following command. ● Display debug information for DHCP server. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. ● Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ● Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode.
Figure 38. Configuring a Relay Agent To view the ip helper-address configuration for an interface, use the show ip interface command from EXEC privilege mode. Example of the show ip interface Command R1_E600#show ip int tengigabitethernet 1/3 TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 is up, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.11.0.1/24 Broadcast address is 10.11.0.255 Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Helper address is 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.
Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: ● The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell EMC Networking OS version and a configuration file). BMP is enabled as a factory-default setting on a switch.
DHCP Snooping A DHCP client can run on a switch simultaneously with the DHCP snooping feature as follows: ● If you enable DHCP snooping globally on a switch and you enable a DHCP client on an interface, the trust port, source MAC address, and snooping table validations are not performed on the interface by DHCP snooping for packets destined to the DHCP client daemon. The following criteria determine packets destined for the DHCP client: ○ DHCP is enabled on the interface.
● Insert Option 82 into DHCP packets. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp relay information-option [trust-downstream] For routers between the relay agent and the DHCP server, enter the trust-downstream option. ● Manually reset the remote ID for Option 82. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp relay information-option remote-id DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping is a feature that protects networks from spoofing. It acts as a firewall between the DHCP server and DHCP clients.
Enabling DHCP Snooping To enable DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1. Enable DHCP snooping globally. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping 2. Specify ports connected to DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode INTERFACE PORT EXTENDER mode ip dhcp snooping trust 3. Enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping vlan name Enabling IPv6 DHCP Snooping To enable IPv6 DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1. Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping globally.
clear ip dhcp snooping binding Clearing the DHCP IPv6 Binding Table To clear the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. ● Delete all of the entries in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding DellEMC# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database Displaying the Contents of the Binding Table To display the contents of the binding table, use the following command. ● Display the DHCP snooping information.
The following example output of the show ip dhcp snooping binding command displays that different IP addresses are mapped to the same MAC address: DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 10.1.1.100 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39735 S Vl 200 Te 1/4 10.1.1.101 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39736 S Vl 200 Te 1/4 10.1.1.
Debugging the IPv6 DHCP To debug the IPv6 DHCP, use the following command. ● Display debug information for IPV6 DHCP. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 dhcp IPv6 DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification Configure to enable verify source mac-address in the DHCP packet against the mac address stored in the snooping binding table. ● Enable IPV6 DHCP snooping .
IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ================================================================ 10.1.1.251 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 172800 D Vl 10 Te 1/2 10.1.1.252 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 172800 D Vl 10 Te 1/1 10.1.1.253 00:00:4d:57:f8:e8 172740 D Vl 10 Te 1/3 10.1.1.
INTERFACE VLAN mode arp inspection To view entries in the ARP database, use the show arp inspection database command. DellEMC#show arp inspection database Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU --------------------------------------------------------------------Internet 10.1.1.251 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 Te 1/2 Vl 10 CP Internet 10.1.1.252 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 Te 1/1 Vl 10 CP Internet 10.1.1.253 00:00:4d:57:f8:e8 Te 1/3 Vl 10 CP Internet 10.1.1.
Enabling IP Source Address Validation IP source address validation (SAV) prevents IP spoofing by forwarding only IP packets that have been validated against the DHCP binding table. A spoofed IP packet is one in which the IP source address is strategically chosen to disguise the attacker. For example, using ARP spoofing, an attacker can assume a legitimate client’s identity and receive traffic addressed to it. Then the attacker can spoof the client’s IP address to interact with other clients.
reload 4. Do one of the following. ● Enable IP+MAC SAV. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation ipmac ● Enable IP+MAC SAV with VLAN option. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation ipmac vlan vlan-id Dell EMC Networking OS creates an ACL entry for each IP+MAC address pair and optionally with its VLAN ID in the binding table and applies it to the interface.
15 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. Topics: • • • • • ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity Link Bundle Monitoring RTAG7 Flow-based Hashing for ECMP ECMP Support in L3 Host and LPM Tables ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Enabling Deterministic ECMP Next Hop Deterministic ECMP next hop arranges all ECMPs in order before writing them into the content addressable memory (CAM).
NOTE: If you remove the hash algorithm configuration, the hash seed does not return to the original factory default setting. To configure the hash algorithm seed, use the following command. ● Specify the hash algorithm seed. CONFIGURATION mode. hash-algorithm seed value [linecard slot-id] [port-set number] The range is from 0 to 4095. Link Bundle Monitoring Link bundle monitoring allows the system to monitor the use of multiple links for an uneven distribution.
ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. 2. Add interfaces to the ECMP group bundle. CONFIGURATION ECMP-GROUP mode interface interface 3. Enable monitoring for the bundle. CONFIGURATION ECMP-GROUP mode link-bundle-monitor enable Modifying the ECMP Group Threshold You can customize the threshold percentage for monitoring ECMP group bundles. To customize the ECMP group bundle threshold and to view the changes, use the following commands. ● Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles.
IPV4 FIELDS : source-ipv4 dest-ipv4 vlan protocol L4-source-port L4-dest-port IPV6 Load Balancing Enabled IPV6 FIELDS : source-ipv6 dest-ipv6 vlan protocol L4-source-port L4-dest-port Mac Load Balancing Enabled MAC FIELDS : source-mac dest-mac vlan ethertype Load Balancing Configuration for tunnels ipv4-over-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-ipv6 Payload header ipv6-over-ipv6 Payload header ipv6-over-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-gre-ipv4 Payload header ipv6-over-gre-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-gre-ipv6 Paylo
Polarization Multipath routing is a method that is often used to address data forwarding issues during network failures so that the network traffic reaches its desired destination. Multipath routing in IP networks is typically implemented using Equal-Cost Multipath (ECMP) routing, which employs load balancing algorithms to distribute the traffic over multiple paths towards its destination.
Selection of Algorithms is available under flow-based-hashing enabling another level of randomness in hash selection.
When the flow-based hashing is enabled at all the nodes in the multi-tier network, traffic distribution is balanced at all tiers of the network nullifying the polarization effect. Traffic occurs by the randomness for the flow-based hashing algorithm across multiple nodes in a given network. ECMP Support in L3 Host and LPM Tables The L3 host and Longest Prefix Match (LPM) tables provide ECMP next-hop forwarding for destination addresses.
16 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces orZ9500 switch..
Table 30. FIP Functions FIP Function Description FIP VLAN discovery FCoE devices (ENodes) discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic. FIP discovery FCoE end-devices and FCFs are automatically discovered. Initialization FCoE devices learn ENodes from the FLOGI and FDISC to allow immediate login and create a virtual link with an FCoE switch. Maintenance A valid virtual link between an FCoE device and an FCoE switch is maintained and the LOGO functions properly.
Port-based ACLs These ACLs are applied on all three port modes: on ports directly connected to an FCF, server-facing ENode ports, and bridge-to-bridge links. Port-based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs. FCoE-generated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames. The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network.
● Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses, advertisements, solicitations, FLOGI/FDISC requests and responses, FLOGO requests and responses, keep-alive packets, and clear virtual-link messages. Using FIP Snooping There are four steps to configure FCoE transit. 1. Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. 2. Enable FIP snooping globally on all Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) or individual VLANs on a FIP snooping bridge. 3.
To support FIP-Snooping and set CAM-ACL, usecam-acl l2acl 4 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 fcoeacl 2 command.
Configure the FC-MAP Value You can configure the FC-MAP value to be applied globally by the switch on all or individual FCoE VLANs to authorize FCoE traffic. The configured FC-MAP value is used to check the FC-MAP value for the MAC address assigned to ENodes in incoming FCoE frames. If the FC-MAP value does not match, FCoE frames are dropped. A session between an ENode and an FCF is established by the switch-bridge only when the FC-MAP value on the FCF matches the FC-MAP value on the FIP snooping bridge.
● The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32. To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64, use the fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac command. ● The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is twelve. ● When FCoE is configured on fanned-out ports or unusable 100G ports, traffic outage occurs for about 45 seconds. Configuring FIP Snooping You can enable FIP snooping globally on all FCoE VLANs on a switch or on an individual FCoE VLAN.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 43. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the FCF-Facing Port Example of Configuring FIP Snooping Ports as Tagged Members of the FCoE VLAN After FIP packets are exchanged between the ENode and the switch, a FIP snooping session is established. ACLs are dynamically generated for FIP snooping on the FIP snooping bridge/switch. Displaying FIP Snooping Information Use the following show commands to display information on FIP snooping. Table 32.
Table 33. show fip-snooping sessions Command Description (continued) Field Description FCF Interface Slot/port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session assigned by the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel ID assigned by the FCF. Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA port. Port WWNN Worldwide node name of the CNA port. The following example shows the show fip-snooping config command.
Table 35. show fip-snooping fcf Command Description (continued) Field Description No of ENodes Number of ENodes connected to the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping statistics interface vlan command (VLAN and port). The following example shows the show fip-snooping statistics port-channel command.
Table 36. show fip-snooping statistics Command Descriptions (continued) Field Description Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FIP FDISC accept frames received on the interface.
17 FIPS Cryptography Federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce. FIPS mode is also validated for numerous platforms to meet the FIPS-140-2 standard for a softwarebased cryptographic module. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell EMC Networking platforms.
When you enable FIPS mode, the following actions are taken: ● If enabled, the SSH server is disabled. ● All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, are closed. ● Any existing host keys (both RSA and RSA1) are deleted from system memory and NVRAM storage. ● FIPS mode is enabled. ○ If you enable the SSH server when you enter the fips mode enable command, it is re-enabled for version 2 only. ○ If you re-enable the SSH server, a new RSA host key-pair is generated automatically.
Dell Networking OS Version : 1-0(0-4072) Jumbo Capable : yes Boot Flash : 3.2.1.0 Boot Selector : 3.2.0.
Service Tag Expr Svc Code Auto Reboot Last Restart Burned In MAC No Of MACs : : : : : : N/A N/A disabled powered-on 74:86:7a:ff:71:8c 3 -- Linecard 2 -Unit Type : Linecard Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : Z9500LC12 - 12-port TE/FG (ZC) Hardware Rev : 1.0 Num Ports : 48 Up Time : 2 min, 7 sec Dell Networking OS Version : 1-0(0-4072) Jumbo Capable : yes Boot Flash : 3.2.1.0 Boot Selector : 3.2.0.
To disable FIPS mode, use the following command. ● To disable FIPS mode from a console port. CONFIGURATION mode no fips mode enable The following Warning message displays: WARNING: Disabling FIPS mode will close all SSH/Telnet connections, restart those servers, and destroy all configured host keys.
18 Flex Hash This chapter describes the Flex Hash enhancements. Topics: • • • • Flex Hash Capability Overview Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview Preserving 802.1Q VLAN Tag Value for Lite Subinterfaces Flex Hash Capability Overview The flex hash functionality enables you to configure a packet search key and matches packets based on the search key.
2. Use the load-balance flexhash command to specify whether IPv4 or IPv6 packets must be subjected to the flex hash functionality, a unique protocol number, the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header to be used for hash calculation, and a meaningful description to associate the protocol number with the name.
If a VLAN is split into multiple, different sub-VLANs, each VLAN is denoted by a unique 8021.Q tag to enable the nodes that receive the traffic frames determine the VLAN for which the frames are destined. Typically, a Layer 3 physical interface processes only untagged or priority-tagged packets. Tagged packets that are received on Layer 3 physical interfaces are dropped.
19 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
Figure 44. Example of Multiple Rings Connected by Single Switch Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. ● The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. ● You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202, as shown in the illustration in Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose.
● If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs, they cannot share any links between them. ● Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes. ● Each ring has only one Master node; all others are transit nodes. FRRP Configuration These are the tasks to configure FRRP.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode. interface primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan id Interface: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 4.
5. Identify the Member VLANs for this FRRP group. CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6. Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. ● Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks ● ● ● ● ● Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only. Spanning Tree (if you enable it globally) must be disabled on both Primary and Secondary interfaces when you enable FRRP.
interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 controlvlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address
Figure 45. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M1 to M10) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings. The secondary port P2 is tagged to the control VLAN (V1). VLTi is implicitly tagged to the member VLANs when these VLANs are configured in the VLT peer. As a result of the VLT Node2 configuration on R2, the secondary interface P2 is blocked for the member VLANs (M11 to Mn). Following figure illustrated the FRRP Ring R1 topology: Figure 46.
20 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 47. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1. Enabling GVRP Globally 2.
gvrp enable DellEMC(conf)#protocol gvrp DellEMC(config-gvrp)#no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. ● Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/21)# Configure a GARP Timer Set GARP timers to the same values on all devices that are exchanging information using GVRP. There are three GARP timer settings. ● Join — A GARP device reliably transmits Join messages to other devices by sending each Join message two times. To define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message, use this parameter. The Dell EMC Networking OS default is 200ms.
21 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
Figure 48. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. ● Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers. ● To enable filtering, routers must keep track of more state information, that is, the list of sources that must be filtered.
Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1. The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2. The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1. Include messages prevents traffic from all other sources in the group from reaching the subnet.
Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1. Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary. 2.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● Adjusting Timers Configuring a Static IGMP Group Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave IGMP Snooping Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes Designating a Multicast Router Interface Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. ● View IGMP-enabled interfaces.
Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command. ● View both learned and statically configured IGMP groups. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups DellEMC# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface 225.1.1.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 225.1.2.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Mode IGMPV2 IGMPV2 Uptime 00:11:19 00:10:19 Expires 00:01:50 00:01:50 Last Reporter 165.87.34.100 165.87.31.
Adjusting the IGMP Querier Timeout Value If there is more than one multicast router on a subnet, only one is elected to be the querier, which is the router that sends queries to the subnet. 1. Routers send queries to the all multicast systems address, 224.0.0.1. Initially, all routers send queries. 2. When a router receives a query, it compares the IP address of the interface on which it was received with the source IP address given in the query.
IGMP Snooping IGMP snooping enables switches to use information in IGMP packets to generate a forwarding table that associates ports with multicast groups so that when they receive multicast frames, they can forward them only to interested receivers. Multicast packets are addressed with multicast MAC addresses, which represent a group of devices, rather than one unique device.
INTERFACE VLAN mode show config DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address ip igmp snooping fast-leave shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)# Disabling Multicast Flooding If the switch receives a multicast packet that has an IP address of a group it has not learned (unregistered frame), the switch floods that packet out of all ports on the VLAN. When you configure the no ip igmp snooping flood command, the system drops the packets immediately.
Adjusting the Last Member Query Interval To adjust the last member query interval, use the following command. When the querier receives a Leave message from a receiver, it sends a group-specific query out of the ports specified in the forwarding table. If no response is received, it sends another. The amount of time that the querier waits to receive a response to the initial query before sending a second one is the last member query interval (LMQI).
22 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Displaying Traffic Statistics on HiGig Ports Link Bundle Monitoring Monitoring HiGig Link Bundles Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers Splitting 40G Ports without Reload Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics Link Dampening Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Configure the MTU Size on an Interface Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces View Advanced Interface Information Configuring the Tr
Table 37. Different Types of Interfaces (continued) Interface Type Modes Possible Default Mode Requires Creation Default State VLAN L2, L3 L2 Yes (except default) L2 - Shutdown (disabled) L3 - No Shutdown (enabled) View Basic Interface Information To view basic interface information, use the following command. You have several options for viewing interface status and configuration parameters. ● Lists all configurable interfaces on the chassis.
To view which interfaces are enabled for Layer 3 data transmission, use the show ip interfaces brief command in EXEC Privilege mode. In the following example, TenGigabitEthernet interface 1/6 is in Layer 3 mode because an IP address has been assigned to it and the interface’s status is operationally up.
3. Verify the configuration. INTERFACE mode show config DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/5)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 no ip address shutdown All the applied configurations are removed and the interface is set to the factory default state. Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface command. 1.
Refer to Port Numbering Conventionfor the exact port location on Z9500 line cards. Network Processing Units (NPUs) The Z9500 uses network processing units (NPUs) to process traffic from front-end I/O ports and interconnect packetprocessing elements in the chassis to form one fully connected logical switch. The interconnect links run across 40-Gigabit Ethernet internal ports. A 40-Gigabit Ethernet internal port is also referred to as a HiGig port.
switchport DellEMC(conf-if)#show config ! interface Port-channel 1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if)# Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. ● Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown ● Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode.
INTERFACE mode no shutdown ● Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx). Add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can only configure one primary IP address per interface. You can configure up to 255 secondary IP addresses on a single interface.
2. Configure which applications uses EIS. EIS mode application {all | application-type} NOTE: If you configure SNMP as the management application for EIS and you add a default management route, when you perform an SNMP walk and check the debugging logs for the source and destination IPs, the SNMP agent uses the destination address of incoming SNMP packets as the source address for outgoing SNMP responses for security.
Received 0 errors, 0 discarded Output 21 packets, 3300 bytes, 20 multicast Output 0 errors, 0 invalid protocol Time since last interface status change: 00:06:03 If there are two RPMs on the system, configure each Management interface with a different IP address. Unless you configure the management route command, you can only access the Management interface from the local LAN. To access the Management interface from another LAN, configure the management route command to point to the Management interface.
E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is 10.11.131.254 to network 0.0.0.0 Destination ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 C 10.11.130.0/23 DellEMC# Gateway ------via 10.11.131.254, Te 1/1 Direct, Te 1/1 Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ----------1/0 1d2h 0/0 1d2h VLAN Interfaces VLANs are logical interfaces and are, by default, in Layer 2 mode.
CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback number The range is from 0 to 16383. ● View Loopback interface configurations. EXEC mode show interface loopback number ● Delete a Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode no interface loopback number Many of the commands supported on physical interfaces are also supported on a Loopback interface. Null Interfaces The Null interface is another virtual interface. There is only one Null interface. It is always up, but no traffic is transmitted through this interface.
Port Channel Implementation Dell EMC Networking OS supports static and dynamic port channels. ● Static — Port channels that are statically configured. ● Dynamic — Port channels that are dynamically configured using the link aggregation control protocol (LACP). For details, see Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). There are 512 port-channels with 16 members per channel. As soon as you configure a port channel, Dell EMC Networking OS treats it like a physical interface. For example, IEEE 802.
Creating a Port Channel You can create up to 512 port channels with up to 16 port members per group on the platform. To configure a port channel, use the following commands. 1. Create a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode.
2 L2L3 up DellEMC# 00:06:03 Te Te Te Te 1/7 (Up) * 1/8 (Up) 1/13 (Up) 1/14 (Up) The following example shows the port channel’s mode (L2 for Layer 2 and L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2-port channel assigned to a routed VLAN), the status, and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel. DellEMC>show interface port-channel 20 Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa Internet address is 1.1.120.
no channel-member interface 2. Change to the second port channel INTERFACE mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode interface port-channel id number 3. Add the interface to the second port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface The following example shows moving an interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3.
An interface without tagging enabled can belong to only one VLAN. ● Remove the port channel with tagging enabled from the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no tagged port-channel id number or no untagged port-channel id number ● Identify which port channels are members of VLANs. EXEC Privilege mode show vlan Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces To configure and verify VLAN tags for individual members of a port channel, perform the following: 1.
● Delete a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode no interface portchannel channel-number ● Disable a port channel. shutdown When you disable a port channel, all interfaces within the port channel are operationally down also. Load Balancing Through Port Channels Dell EMC Networking OS uses hash algorithms for distributing traffic evenly over channel members in a port channel (LAG). The hash algorithm distributes traffic among Equal Cost Multi-path (ECMP) paths and LAG members.
Bulk Configuration Bulk configuration allows you to determine if interfaces are present for physical interfaces or configured for logical interfaces. Interface Range An interface range is a set of interfaces to which other commands may be applied and may be created if there is at least one valid interface within the range. Bulk configuration excludes from configuration any non-existing interfaces from an interface range.
Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range. Example of the interface range Command (Multiple Ranges) DellEMC(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/5 - 10 , tengigabitethernet 1/1 , vlan 1 DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/1,te-1/5-10,vl-1)# Exclude Duplicate Entries The following is an example showing how duplicate entries are omitted from the interface-range prompt.
Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range. Example of Adding VLAN and Port-Channel Interface Ranges DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1-2)# interface range Vlan 2 – 100 , Port 1 – 25 DellEMC(config-if-range-te-1/1-2-vl-2-100-po-1-25)# no shutdown Interface Range Enhancements Inserting a space between comma-separated interfaces and interface ranges in interface range command syntax is no longer required.
Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Monitor interface statistics with the monitor interface command. This command displays an ongoing list of the interface status (up/down), number of packets, traffic statistics, and so on. To view the interface’s statistics, use the following command. ● View the interface’s statistics. EXEC Privilege mode Enter the type of interface and the interface information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Displaying Traffic Statistics on HiGig Ports You can verify the buffer usage and queue counters for high-Gigabit Ethernet (HiGig) ports and link bundles (port channels). The buffer counters supported for front-end ports are extended to HiGig backplane ports. You can display the queue statistics and buffer counters for backplane line-card (leaf) and switch fabric module (SFM - spine) NPU port queues on a Z9500 switch using the show commands described in this section.
Line-card NPUs are numbered as follows: ● Line-card slot 0 uses three NPUs numbered 0 to 2. ● Line-card slot 1 uses four NPUs numbered 0 to 3. ● Line-card slot 2 uses four NPUs numbered 0 to 3. SFM NPUs are numbered 0 to 5. Line-card and SFM NPUs use HiGig link bundles to transmit data. ● An SFM (spine) NPU uses 11 HiGig link bundles, one link bundle to transmit data to each line-card (leaf) NPU. Each HiGig link bundle in an SFM NPU consists of two HiGig links.
● You can enable SNMP traps and syslog messages to be generated when an uneven traffic distribution is detected in a HiGig link bundle. ● Traffic distribution in a HiGig link bundle is calculated as the bandwidth-weighted mean use of all links in the bundle. This calculation is performed only on links that are up in their operational status. ● The rate interval used to poll traffic distribution in member links in a HiGig link bundle is user-configurable. The default polling interval is 15 seconds.
Interface index is 2103813 Internet address is not set Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :3417ebf225c6 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 40000 Mbit
Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port You can convert a QSFP or QSFP+ port to an SFP or SFP+ port using the Quad to Small Form Factor Pluggable Adapter (QSA). QSA provides smooth connectivity between devices that use Quad Lane Ports (such as the 40 Gigabit Ethernet adapters) and 10 Gigabit hardware that uses SFP+ based cabling. Using this adapter, you can effectively use a QSFP or QSFP+ module to connect to a lower-end switch or server that uses an SFP or SFP+ based module.
valid and the output shows that pluggable media (optical cables) is inserted into these ports. This is a software limitation for this release. Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics You can set the wavelength for tunable 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics using the wavelength command. To set the wavelength, follow these steps: ● Enter the interface mode and set the wavelength. INTERFACE mode wavelength 1529.0 The wavelength range is from 1528.3 nm to 1568.77nm. ● Verify configuration changes.
Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● Link dampening is not supported on VLAN interfaces. Link dampening is disabled when the interface is configured for port monitoring. You can apply link dampening to Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces. You can configure link dampening on individual interfaces in a LAG. Configuration Example of Link Dampening The figure shows a how link dampening works in a sample scenario when an interface is configured with dampening.
Figure 54. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example. During the second interface flap (flap 2), again the penalty (1024) is accumulated.
Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. ● Enable link dampening. INTERFACE mode dampening To view the link dampening configuration on an interface, use the show config command. R1(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.19.1/24 dampening 1 2 3 4 no shutdown To view dampening information on all or specific dampened interfaces, use the show interfaces dampening command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The link MTU is the frame size of a packet, and the IP MTU size is used for IP fragmentation. If the system determines that the IP packet must be fragmented as it leaves the interface, Dell EMC Networking OS divides the packet into fragments no bigger than the size set in the ip mtu command.
Enabling Pause Frames Enable Ethernet pause frames flow control on all ports on a chassis or a line card. If not, the system may exhibit unpredictable behavior. NOTE: Changes in the flow-control values may not be reflected automatically in the show interface output. As a workaround, apply the new settings, execute shut then no shut on the interface, and then check the running-config of the port. NOTE: If you disable rx flow control, Dell EMC Networking recommends rebooting the system.
Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. Port Channels: ● All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. ● The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.
NOTE: While using 10GBASE-T, auto-negotiation is enabled on the external PHY by default, and auto-negotiation should be enabled on the peer for the link to come up. View Advanced Interface Information The following options have been implemented for the show [ip | running-config] interfaces commands for (only) linecard interfaces. When you use the configured keyword, only interfaces that have non-default configurations are displayed.
The bold lines shows the default value of 299 seconds, the change-rate interval of 100, and the new rate interval set to 100.
The bold lines shows the default value of 299 seconds, the change-rate interval of 100, and the new rate interval set to 100.
Output 100.00 Mbits/sec, 4636111 packets/sec, 10.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 21:00:43 Dynamic Counters By default, counting is enabled for IPFLOW, IPACL, L2ACL, L2FIB. For the remaining applications, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically turns on counting when you enable the application, and is turned off when you disable the application. NOTE: If you enable more than four counter-dependent applications on a port pipe, there is an impact on line rate performance.
23 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and FTP protocols. It supports two operational modes: Transport and Tunnel. ● Transport mode — (default) Use to encrypt only the payload of the packet. Routing information is unchanged.
match 0 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 23 match 1 tcp a::1 /128 23 a::2 /128 0 match 2 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 21 match 3 tcp a::1 /128 21 a::2 /128 0 match 4 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 match 5 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 23 1.1.1.2 /32 0 match 6 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 7 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.2 /32 0 3. Apply the crypto policy to management traffic.
24 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks. Supernetting, which increases the number of subnets, is also supported. To subnet, you add a mask to the IP address to separate the network and host portions of the IP address.
INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] ● ip-address mask: the IP address must be in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash prefixlength format (/24). ● secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or use the show ip interface command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the second example.
S 6.1.2.13/32 S 6.1.2.14/32 S 6.1.2.15/32 S 6.1.2.16/32 S 6.1.2.17/32 S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, Direct, Nu 0 Te Te Te Te Te 5/1 5/1 5/1 5/1 5/1 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 0/0 00:02:30 00:02:30 00:02:30 00:02:30 00:02:30 00:02:30 Dell EMC Networking OS installs a next hop that is on the directly connected subnet of current IP address on the interface.
In a dual stack setup, the system sends both A ( for IPv4 — RFC 1035) and AAAA ( for IPv6 — RFC 3596) record requests to a DNS server even if you configure only the ip name-server command. Name server, Domain name, and Domain list are VRF specific. The maximum number of Name servers and Domain lists per VRF is six. Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands. ● Enable dynamic resolution of host names.
Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. ● Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup ● Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use.
● ● ● ● Clearing ARP Cache (optional) ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP ARP Learning via ARP Request Configuring ARP Retries Configuring Static ARP Entries ARP dynamically maps the MAC and IP addresses, and while most network host support dynamic mapping, you can configure an ARP entry (called a static ARP) for the ARP cache. To configure a static ARP entry, use the following command. ● Configure an IP address and MAC address mapping for an interface.
○ For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ○ For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. NOTE: Transit traffic may not be forwarded during the period when deleted ARP entries are resolved again and re-installed in CAM. Use this option with extreme caution. ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Gratuitous ARP can mean an ARP request or reply.
Figure 56. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. ● Set the number of ARP retries.
Enabling ICMP Unreachable Messages By default, ICMP unreachable messages are disabled. When enabled, ICMP unreachable messages are created and sent out all interfaces. To disable and re-enable ICMP unreachable messages, use the following commands. ● To disable ICMP unreachable messages. INTERFACE mode no ip unreachable ● Set Dell EMC Networking OS to create and send ICMP unreachable messages on the interface.
ip udp-broadcast-address DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 untagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 no shutdown To view the configured broadcast address for an interface, use show interfaces command.
Figure 57. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
Figure 59. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. ● If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. ● If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
25 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
● Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) — Before configuring its IPv6 address, an IPv6 host node device checks whether that address is used anywhere on the network using this mechanism. ● Prefix Renumbering — Useful in transparent renumbering of hosts in the network when an organization changes its service provider. NOTE: As an alternative to stateless autoconfiguration, network hosts can obtain their IPv6 addresses using the dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) servers via stateful auto-configuration.
Version (4 bits) The Version field always contains the number 6, referring to the packet’s IP version. Traffic Class (8 bits) The Traffic Class field deals with any data that needs special handling. These bits define the packet priority and are defined by the packet Source. Sending and forwarding routers use this field to identify different IPv6 classes and priorities. Routers understand the priority settings and handle them appropriately during conditions of congestion.
Hop Limit (8 bits) The Hop Limit field shows the number of hops remaining for packet processing. In IPv4, this is known as the Time to Live (TTL) field and uses seconds rather than hops. Each time the packet moves through a forwarding router, this field decrements by 1. If a router receives a packet with a Hop Limit of 1, it decrements it to 0 (zero). The router discards the packet and sends an ICMPv6 message back to the sending router indicating that the Hop Limit was exceeded in transit.
11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination. The value is 1 if it can change; the value is 0 if it cannot change.
Implementing IPv6 with Dell EMC Networking OS Dell EMC Networking OS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 and both may be used simultaneously in your system. Longest Prefix Match (LPM) Table and IPv6 /65 – /128 support The LPM CAM table consists of two partitions: Partition I for IPv6 /65-/128 route-prefix entries and Partition II for IPv6 0/0-/64 and IPv4 0/0-0/32 route-prefix entries. You must reconfigure LPM CAM to allow IPv6 /65-/128 route prefixes to be stored in Partition I.
Figure 61. Path MTU Discovery Process IPv6 Neighbor Discovery The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) is a top-level protocol for neighbor discovery on an IPv6 network. In place of address resolution protocol (ARP), NDP uses “Neighbor Solicitation” and “Neighbor Advertisement” ICMPv6 messages for determining relationships between neighboring nodes.
Figure 62. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
● invalid host addresses If you specify this information in the IPv6 RDNSS configuration, a DNS error is displayed. Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:ff00:12 ff02::1:ff8b:7570 ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 20120 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 ND dns-server ad
You must enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10). All other profile allocations can use either even or odd-numbered ranges. The default option sets the CAM Profile as follows: ● L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6 ● L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 ● IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 ● L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 ● L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 To have the changes take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings. ● Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs.
CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] prefix interface-type slot/port forwarding router tag ○ vrf vrf-name:(OPTIONAL) name of the VRF. ○ prefix: IPv6 route prefix ○ slot/port : interface type and slot/port ○ forwarding router: forwarding router’s address ○ tag: route tag Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
show ipv6 ? DellEMC#show accounting cam fib interface mbgproutes mld mroute neighbors ospf pim prefix-list route rpf DellEMC# ipv6 ? IPv6 accounting information IPv6 CAM Entries IPv6 FIB Entries IPv6 interface information MBGP routing table MLD information IPv6 multicast-routing table IPv6 neighbor information OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use th
Showing IPv6 Routes To view the global IPv6 routing information, use the following command. ● Show IPv6 routing information for the specified route type. EXEC mode show ipv6 route type The following keywords are available: ○ To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). ○ To display information about a host, enter hostname. ○ To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all.
----------------------------------------------------S 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222::/96 [1/0] via 2222:2222:3333:3333::1, Te 9/1, 00:03:16 S 9999:9999:9999:9999::/64 [1/0] via 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222:3333:4444, 00:03:16 Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface To view the configuration for any interface, use the following command. ● Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
The following example shows how to disable the ND timer. DellEMC(conf-if-fo-1/1/1)#ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer Configuring IPv6 RA Guard The IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard allows you to block or reject the unwanted router advertisement guard messages that arrive at the network device platform. To configure the IPv6 RA guard, perform the following steps: 1. Configure the terminal to enter the Global Configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode configure terminal 2. Enable the IPv6 RA guard.
POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode mtu value 13. Set the advertised reachability time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode reachable—time value The reachability time range is from 0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds. 14. Set the advertised retransmission time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode retrans—timer value The retransmission time range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds. 15. Display the configurations applied on the RA guard policy mode.
26 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables qualityof-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
switch. Preferential treatment helps to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause dropped iSCSI packets. ● iSCSI DCBx TLVs are supported. The following illustration shows iSCSI optimization between servers and a storage array in which a stack of three switches connect installed servers (iSCSI initiators) to a storage array (iSCSI targets) in a SAN network.
Table 40. iSCSI Optimization Defaults (continued) Parameter Default Value VLAN priority tag iSCSI flows are assigned by default to dot1p priority 4 without the remark setting. DSCP None: user-configurable. Remark Not configured. iSCSI session aging time 10 minutes iSCSI optimization target ports iSCSI well-known ports 3260 and 860 are configured as default (with no IP address or name) but can be removed as any other configured target. iSCSI session monitoring Disabled.
5. Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload After the switch is reloaded, DCB/ DCBx and iSCSI monitoring are enabled. 6. (Optional) Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication is monitored. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16] [ip-address address] ● tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests.
INTERFACE mode [no] iscsi profile-compellent. The default is: Compellent disk arrays are not detected. Displaying iSCSI Optimization Information To display information on iSCSI optimization, use the following show commands. ● Display the currently configured iSCSI settings. show iscsi ● Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. show iscsi session ● Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
The following example shows the show iscsi session detailed command. VLT PEER1 Dell# show iscsi session detailed Session 0: -------------------------------------------------------Target:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia:ixload:iscsi-TG1 Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.ixload:initiator-iscsi-2c Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS) Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS) ISID:806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID 10.10.0.44 33345 10.10.0.
Synchronizing iSCSI Sessions Learned on VLT-Lags with VLT-Peer The following behavior occurs during synchronization of iSCSI sessions. ● If the iSCSI login request packet is received on a port belonging to a VLT lag, the information is synced to the VLT peer and the connection is associated with this interface. ● Additional updates to connections (including aging updates) that are learnt on VLT lag members are synced to the peer.
Detection and Auto-Configuration for Dell EqualLogic Arrays The iSCSI optimization feature includes auto-provisioning support with the ability to detect directly connected Dell EqualLogic storage arrays and automatically reconfigure the switch to enhance storage traffic flows. The switch uses the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) to discover Dell EqualLogic devices on the network. LLDP is enabled by default. For more information about LLDP, refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
Application of Quality of Service to iSCSI Traffic Flows You can configure iSCSI CoS mode. This mode controls whether CoS (dot1p priority) queue assignment and/or packet marking is performed on iSCSI traffic. When you enable iSCSI CoS mode, the CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic. When you disable iSCSI CoS mode, iSCSI sessions and connections are still detected and displayed in the status tables, but no CoS policy is applied to iSCSI traffic.
27 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
Figure 64. ISO Address Format Multi-Topology IS-IS Multi-topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) allows you to create multiple IS-IS topologies on a single router with separate databases. Use this feature to place a virtual physical topology into logical routing domains, which can each support different routing and security policies. All routers on a LAN or point-to-point must have at least one common supported topology when operating in Multi-Topology IS-IS mode.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change. Normally, when an IS-IS router is restarted, temporary disruption of routing occurs due to events in both the restarting router and the neighbors of the restarting router.
● Computes routes to IPv6 destinations. ● Downloads IPv6 routes to the RTM for installing in the FIB. ● Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 41.
In IS-IS, neighbors form adjacencies only when they are same IS type. For example, a Level 1 router never forms an adjacency with a Level 2 router. A Level 1-2 router forms Level 1 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 1 router and forms Level 2 adjacencies with a neighboring Level 2 router. NOTE: Even though you enable IS-IS globally, enable the IS-IS process on an interface for the IS-IS process to exchange protocol information and form adjacencies. To configure IS-IS globally, use the following commands.
To view the IS-IS configuration, enter the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode or the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode. DellEMC#show isis protocol IS-IS Router: System Id: EEEE.EEEE.EEEE IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 47.0004.004d.0001 Routing for area address(es): 21.2223.2425.2627.2829.3031.3233 47.0004.004d.
ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode set-overload-bit 3. Set the minimum interval between SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode spf-interval [level-l | level-2 | interval] [initial_wait_interval [second_wait_interval]] Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using single-topology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4. Implement a wide metric-style globally.
○ adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. ○ manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary. To change the defaults, use any or all of the following commands. ● Set interval between LSP generation. ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-gen-interval [level-1 | level-2] seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 0 to 120.
Table 42. Metric Styles Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces narrow Sends and accepts narrow or old TLVs (Type, Length, Value). 0 to 63 wide Sends and accepts wide or new TLVs. 0 to 16777215 transition Sends both wide (new) and narrow (old) TLVs. 0 to 63 narrow transition Sends narrow (old) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 63 wide transition Sends wide (new) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs.
isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] ○ default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles. The range is from 0 to 16777215 for wide metric styles. The default is 10. The default level is level-1. For more information about this command, refer to Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style. The following table describes the correct value range for the isis metric command.
LSPID B233.00-00 eljefe.00-00 * eljefe.01-00 * eljefe.02-00 * Force10.00-00 LSP Seq Num 0x00000006 0x0000000D 0x00000001 0x00000001 0x00000004 LSP Checksum 0xC38A 0x51C6 0x68DF 0x2E7F 0xCDA9 LSP Holdtime 1124 1129 1122 1113 1107 ATT/P/OL 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0 DellEMC# Controlling Routing Updates To control the source of IS-IS route information, use the following command. ● Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving IS-IS routing information.
○ static: for user-configured routes. ○ bgp: for BGP routes only. ● Deny RTM download for pre-existing redistributed IPv4 routes. ROUTER ISIS mode distribute-list redistributed-override in Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. ● Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
Configure the following parameters: ○ level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. ○ metric-value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. ○ metric-type: choose either external or internal. The default is internal. ○ map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. ● Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.
Configuring Authentication Passwords You can assign an authentication password for routers in Level 1 and for routers in Level 2. Because Level 1 and Level 2 routers do not communicate with each other, you can assign different passwords for Level 1 routers and for Level 2 routers. However, if you want the routers in the level to communicate with each other, configure them with the same password. To configure a simple text password, use the following commands. ● Configure authentication password for an area.
Debugging IS-IS To debug IS-IS processes, use the following commands. ● View all IS-IS information. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis ● View information on all adjacency-related activity (for example, hello packets that are sent and received). EXEC Privilege mode debug isis adj-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: ○ interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only.
Configure Metric Values For any level (Level-1, Level-2, or Level-1-2), the value range possible in the isis metric command in INTERFACE mode changes depending on the metric style. The following describes the correct value range for the isis metric command.
Table 43.
Table 45.
Figure 65. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.1/24 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ip router isis ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis metric-style wide level-1 metric-style wide level-2 net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
28 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
● You can configure link dampening on individual members of a LAG. LACP Modes Dell EMC Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. ● Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. ● Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel ● Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode switchport DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 32 DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#switchport The LAG is in the default VLAN. To place the LAG into a non-default VLAN, use the tagged command on the LAG.
NOTE: The 30-second timeout is available for dynamic LAG interfaces only. You can enter the lacp long-timeout command for static LAGs, but it has no effect. To configure LACP long timeout, use the following command. ● Set the LACP timeout value to 30 seconds.
Figure 66. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell EMC Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group.
Figure 67. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking The following are shared LAG state tracking console messages: ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 1 ● 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 To view the status of a failover group member, use the show interface port-channel command.
LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology. Two routers are named ALPHA and BRAVO, and their hostname prompts reflect those names. Figure 68. LACP Basic Configuration Example Configure a LAG on ALPHA The following example creates a LAG on ALPHA.
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics 136 packets, 16718 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 15 over 64-byte pkts, 121 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 136 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#end ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address ! port-ch
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
29 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Topics: • • • • • • Manage the MAC Address Table MAC Learning Limit Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System NIC Teaming Configure Redundant Pairs Far-End Failure Detection Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. ● Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. ● Display the contents of the MAC address table.
Setting the MAC Learning Limit To set a MAC learning limit on an interface, use the following command. ● Specify the number of MAC addresses that the system can learn off a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode mac learning-limit address_limit Three options are available with the mac learning-limit command: ○ dynamic ○ no-station-move ○ station-move NOTE: An SNMP trap is available for mac learning-limit station-move. No other SNMP traps are available for MAC Learning Limit, including limit violations.
mac learning-limit no-station-move The no-station-move option, also known as “sticky MAC,” provides additional port security by preventing a station move. When you configure this option, the first entry in the table is maintained instead of creating an entry on the new interface. no-station-move is the default behavior. Entries created before you set this option are not affected. To display a list of all interfaces with a MAC learning limit, use the following command.
● Display a list of all of the interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation. CONFIGURATION mode show mac learning-limit violate-action NOTE: When the MAC learning limit (MLL) is configured as no-station-move, the MLL will be processed as static entries internally. For static entries, the MAC address will be installed in all port-pipes, irrespective of the VLAN membership.
Figure 75. Redundant NICs with NIC Teaming When you use NIC teaming, consider that the server MAC address is originally learned on Port 0/1 of the switch (shown in the following) and Port 0/5 is the failover port. When the NIC fails, the system automatically sends an ARP request for the gateway or host NIC to resolve the ARP and refresh the egress interface.
NOTE: For more information about STP, refer to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Assign a backup interface to an interface using the switchport backup command. The backup interface remains in a Down state until the primary fails, at which point it transitions to Up state. If the primary interface fails, and later comes up, it becomes the backup interface for the redundant pair. Dell EMC Networking OS supports Gigabit, 10 Gigabit, and 40-Gigabit interfaces as backup interfaces.
Important Points about Configuring Redundant Pairs ● You may not configure any interface to be a backup for more than one interface, no interface can have more than one backup, and a backup interface may not have a backup interface. ● The active or backup interface may not be a member of a LAG. ● The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on). ● You may not enable any Layer 2 protocol on any interface of a redundant pair or to ports connected to them.
standby: Po 2 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# DellEMC# DellEMC#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Interface Port-channel 1 Active Port-chato mannel 2 Port-channel 2 Standby Port-channel 1 DellEMC# Status Standby Active DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface tengigabitethernet 1/2 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN: Do not run any Layer2 protocols on Po 1 and Te 1/2 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# Far-End Failure Detection Far-end failure detection (FEFD) is a protocol tha
FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive. When you enable Normal mode on an interface and a far-end failure is detected, no intervention is required to reset the interface to bring it back to an FEFD operational state. When you enable Aggressive mode on an interface in the same state, manual intervention is required to reset the interface.
To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1. Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3. INTERFACE mode ip address ip address, switchport 2. Enable the necessary ports administratively. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Enable fefd globally. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global {interval | mode} To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode.
fefd {disable | interval | mode} DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport fefd mode normal no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#do show fefd | grep 1/1 Te 1/1 Normal 3 Unknown Debugging FEFD To debug FEFD, use the first command. To provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection, use the second command. ● Display output whenever events occur that initiate or disrupt an FEFD enabled connection.
30 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 802.
Figure 79. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Segment TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit (LLDPDU) (shown in the following table), which is transmitted from one LLDP-enabled device to its LLDP-enabled neighbors. LLDP is a one-way protocol. LLDP-enabled devices (LLDP agents) can transmit and/or receive advertisements, but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements. There are five types of TLVs. All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs.
Optional TLVs The Dell EMC Networking OS supports these optional TLVs: management TLVs, IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 organizationally specific TLVs, and TIA-1057 organizationally specific TLVs. Management TLVs A management TLV is an optional TLVs sub-type. This kind of TLV contains essential management information about the sender. Organizationally Specific TLVs A professional organization or a vendor can define organizationally specific TLVs.
Table 48. Optional TLV Types (continued) Type TLV Description port belongs (and the untagged VLAN to which a port belongs if the port is in Hybrid mode). 127 Protocol Identity Indicates the protocols that the port can process. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Indicates the capability and current setting of the duplex status and bit rate, and whether the current settings are the result of auto-negotiation.
TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs The Dell EMC Networking system is an LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device (Device Type 4). Network connectivity devices are responsible for: ● transmitting an LLDP-MED capability TLV to endpoint devices ● storing the information that endpoint devices advertise The following table describes the five types of TIA-1057 Organizationally Specific TLVs. Table 49.
Table 49. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs (continued) Type SubType TLV Description 127 11 Inventory — Asset ID Indicates a user specified device number to manage inventory. 127 12–255 Reserved — LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV.
LLDP-MED Network Policies TLV A network policy in the context of LLDP-MED is a device’s VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 configurations. LLDP-MED network policies TLV include: ● VLAN ID ● VLAN tagged or untagged status ● Layer 2 priority ● DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined.
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. ● Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell EMC Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
● 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. ● Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2. Enter LLDP management-interface mode. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode management-interface 3. Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP on Management Ports To disable or undo LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ power-via-mdi softphone-voice streaming-video video-conferencing video-signaling voice voice-signaling In the following example, LLDP is enabled globally. R1 and R2 are transmitting periodic LLDPDUs that contain management, 802.1, and 802.3 TLVs. Figure 85. Configuring LLDP Storing and Viewing Unrecognized LLDP TLVs Dell EMC Networking OS provides support to store unrecognized (reserved and organizational specific) LLDP TLVs.
NOTE: The system increments the TLV discard counter and does not store unrecognized LLDP TLV information in following scenarios: ● If there are multiple TLVs with the same information is received ● If DCBX is down on the receiving interface The organizational specific TLV list is limited to store 256 entries per neighbor. If TLV entries are more than 256, then the oldest entry (of that neighbor) in the list is replaced.
Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Neighbors To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising, use the following commands. ● Display brief information about adjacent devices. show lldp neighbors ● Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising.
( 19, 4) ( 20, 4) ( 21, 4) ( 22, 4) ( 23, 4) ( 24, 4) ( 25, 4) ( 29, 4) ( 30, 4) ( 31, 4) ( 32, 4) ( 33, 4) ( 34, 4) ( 35, 4) ( 39, 4) ( 40, 4) ( 41, 4) ( 42, 4) ( 43, 4) ( 44, 4) ( 45, 4) ( 49, 4) ( 50, 4) ( 51, 4) ( 52, 4) ( 53, 4) ( 54, 4) ( 55, 4) ( 59, 4) ( 60, 4) ( 61, 4) ( 62, 4) ( 63, 4) ( 64, 4) ( 65, 4) ( 69, 4) ( 70, 4) ( 71, 4) ( 72, 4) ( 73, 4) ( 74, 4) ( 75, 4) ( 79, 4) ( 80, 4) ( 81, 4) ( 82, 4) ( 83, 4) ( 84, 4) ( 85, 4) ( 89, 4) ( 90, 4) ( 91, 4) ( 92, 4) ( 93, 4) ( 94, 4) ( 95, 4) ( 99, 4)
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode hello R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#mode ? rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities s
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode no mode R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#mode ? rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities
R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving. To view the TLVs, use the following commands. ● View a readable version of the TLVs.
Dec 4 22:38:28 : 00:a0:c9:00:00:01 Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : Dec 4 22:38:29 : TLV: Chassis ID, Len: 7, Subtype: Mac address (4) Value: TLV: Port ID, Len: 2, Subtype: Interface name (5) Value: T TLV: TTL, Len: 2, Value: 300 TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, ORG_SPEC[aa-bb-cc, 4], Len: 1, Value:a aa bb cc 04 61 40 TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, Type: 125 Len: 1, Value: @ TLV: ENDOFPDU, Len: 0 Relevant Management Objects Dell EMC Networking OS supports all IEEE
Table 54.
Table 55. LLDP 802.
Table 56.
31 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Microsoft NLB clustering allows multiple servers running Microsoft Windows to be represented by one MAC and one IP address to provide transparent failover and load-balancing.
NLB Multicast Mode Example Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm. This set of servers is connected to a Layer 3 switch, which in turn is connected to the end-clients. They contain a single multicast MAC address (MAC-Cluster: 03-00-5E-11-11-11). In the multicast NLB mode, a static ARP configuration command is configured to associate the cluster IP address with a multicast cluster MAC address.
NLB VLAN Flooding To preserve Microsoft server failover and load-balancing, configure a switch to forward the traffic destined for a server cluster on all member ports of the VLAN connected to the cluster (ip vlan-floodingcommand). Configure the switch for NLB VLAN flooding when you configure the server cluster. After you configure a switch to perform NLB VLAN flooding: ● Older ARP entries are overwritten when newer NLB entries are learned.
32 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
Figure 88.
Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process. 1. Enable an exterior gateway protocol (EGP) with at least two routing domains. Refer to the following figures. The MSDP Sample Configurations show the OSPF-BGP configuration used in this chapter for MSDP.
Figure 89.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
CONFIGURATION mode clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | local | rejected-sa] Enabling the Rejected Source-Active Cache To cache rejected sources, use the following command. Active sources can be rejected because the RPF check failed, the SA limit is reached, the peer RP is unreachable, or the SA message has a format error. ● Cache rejected sources.
Figure 93.
Figure 94.
Figure 95. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. ● Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check. DellEMC(conf)#ip msdp peer 10.0.50.
DellEMC#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Reason Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer To limit the source-active messages from a peer, use the following commands. 1.
Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1. OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp cache-rejected-sa 2. Prevent the system from caching remote sources learned from a specific peer based on source and group. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp sa-filter list out peer list ext-acl As shown in the following example, R1 is advertising source 10.11.4.2.
GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1 Expire 70 UpTime 00:27:20 Expire 1 UpTime 00:10:29 [Router 3] R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3(conf)# To display the configured SA filters for a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command from EXEC Privilege mode.
clear ip msdp peer peer-address R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.3(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:04:26 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 5/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.
1. All the RPs serving a given group are configured with an identical anycast address. 2. Sources then register with the topologically closest RP. 3. RPs use MSDP to peer with each other using a unique address. Figure 96. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2.
ip msdp peer 5. Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP. When multiple RPs exist within a domain, the RPs forward received active source information back to the originating RP, which violates the RFP rule. You can prevent this unnecessary flooding by creating a mesh-group.
33 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• • • • • • Modifying Global Parameters Modifying the Interface Parameters Configuring an EdgePort Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change MSTP Sample Configurations Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 57. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .
● Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. ● Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. 1. Enter PROTOCOL MSTP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree mstp 2. Enable MSTP.
MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping. To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode.
NOTE: Some non-Dell devices may implement a non-null default region name. SFTOS, for example, uses the Bridge ID, while others may use a MAC address. Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. ● Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode name name ● Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. 4. Change the max-hops parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-hops number The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20. To view the current values for MSTP parameters, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
1. Change the port cost of an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree msti number cost cost The range is from 0 to 200000. For the default, refer to the default values shown in the table.. 2. Change the port priority of an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree msti number priority priority The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. To view the current values for these interface parameters, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode.
To view the enable status of this feature, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC Privilege mode. MSTP Sample Configurations The running-configurations support the topology shown in the following illustration. The configurations are from Dell EMC Networking OS systems. Figure 98. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1.
1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
○ Does the debug log indicate that packets are coming from a “Different Region”? If so, one of the key parameters is not matching. ● MSTP Region Name and Revision. ○ The configured name and revisions must be identical among all the routers. ○ Is the Region name blank? That may mean that a name was configured on one router and but was not configured or was configured differently on another router (spelling and capitalization counts). ● MSTP Instances.
34 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d ● The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. ● Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. ● If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. First Packet Forwarding for Lossless Multicast All initial multicast packets are forwarded to receivers to achieve lossless multicast.
When the multicast route limit is reached, the following displays: 3w1d13h: %RPM0-P:RP2 %PIM-3-PIM_TIB_LIMIT: PIM TIB limit reached. No new routes will be learnt until TIB level falls below low watermark. 3w1d13h: %RPM0-P:RP2 %PIM-3-PIM_TIB_LIMIT: PIM TIB below low watermark. Route learning will begin. To limit the number of multicast routes, use the following command. ● Limit the total number of multicast routes on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 50000.
Figure 99. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 59. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Table 59. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
ip pim neighbor-filter Preventing a Source from Registering with the RP To prevent the PIM source DR from sending register packets to route processor (RP) for the specified multicast source and group, use the following command. If the source DR never sends register packets to the RP, no hosts can ever discover the source and create a shortest path tree (SPT) to it. ● Prevent a source from transmitting to a particular group.
Table 60. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.1/24 no shutdown 2/1 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 ● ● ● ● Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
● When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver. ● If the CLI session is terminated after the mtrace command is issued, then the response is ignored. ● System ignores any stray mtrace responses that it receives. ● Duplicate query messages as identified by the IP source, and Query ID (tuple) are ignored. However, duplicate request messages are not ignored in a similar manner.
|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ----------------------------------------------------------------0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.0/24 -2 101.101.101.102 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source -----------------------------------------------------------------The following table explains the output of the mtrace command: Table 61.
Table 62. Supported Error Codes (continued) Error Code Error Name Description 0x06 WRONG_LAST_HOP The router is not the proper last-hop router. 0x08 REACHED_RP Reached Rendezvous Point or Core. 0x09 RPF_IF Traceroute request arrived on the expected RPF interface for this source and group. 0x0A NO_MULTICAST Traceroute request arrived on an interface which is not enabled for multicast. 0x81 NO_SPACE There is not enough room to insert another response data block in the packet.
Table 63. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output -------0 0.0.0.0* --> Destination -1 0.0.0.0* PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -2 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------* - Any PIM enabled interface on this node You invoke a weak mtrace request by specifying only the source without specifying the mulicast tree or multicast group information for the source.
Table 63. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario is used even in case where the source provided is not valid. When you issue the mtrace command with the source and multicast group information, if a multicast route is not present on a particular node, then the NO ROUTE error code is displayed on the node. In this scenario, the Source Network/Mask column for that particular node displays the the value as default.
Table 63. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Multicast disabled 6.6.6.
Table 63. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. Output R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 99.99.99.99 to destination 1.1.1.
Table 63. Mtrace Scenarios (continued) Scenario Output -------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 6.6.6.6 to destination 4.4.4.
35 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Figure 101. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.0 and is the core of any AS. All other areas must connect to Area 0. An OSPF backbone is responsible for distributing routing information between areas. It consists of all area border routers, networks not wholly contained in any area, and their attached routers. NOTE: If you configure two non-backbone areas, then you must enable the B bit in OSPF.
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone. The ABR keeps a copy of the link-state database for every area it connects to, so it may keep multiple copies of the link state database.
● Type 3: Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Prefix LSA (OSPFv3) — An ABR takes information it has learned on one of its attached areas and can summarize it before sending it out on other areas it is connected to. The link-state ID of the Type 3 LSA is the destination network number. ● Type 4: AS Border Router Summary LSA (OSPFv2), Inter-Area-Router LSA (OSPFv3) — In some cases, Type 5 External LSAs are flooded to areas where the detailed next-hop information may not be available.
Figure 103. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. Multiple OSPF processes (OSPF MP) are supported OSPFv2 only; up to 32 simultaneous processes are supported.
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell EMC Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.2 aid:1500 chk:0xdbee aut:0 auk: keyid:0 from:Vl 100 LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.1.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.2.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:4(LSUpd) l:100 rid:6.1.0.0 aid:0 chk:0xccbd aut:0 auk: keyid:0 from:Gi 10/21 Number of LSA:2 LSType:Type-5 AS External(5) Age:1 Seq:0x8000000c id:170.1.1.0 Adv:6.1.0.0 Netmask:255.255.255.0 fwd:0.0.0.
NOTE: By default, OSPF is disabled. Configuration Task List for OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) You can perform the following tasks to configure Open Shortest Path First version 2 (OSPF for IPv4) on the switch. Two of the tasks are mandatory; others are optional.
ip address ip-address mask The format is A.B.C.D/M. If you are using a Loopback interface, refer to Loopback Interfaces. 2. Enable the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPFv2 process globally. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf {vrf name}] ● vrf name: enter the keyword VRF and the instance name to tie the OSPF instance to the VRF. All network commands under this OSPF instance are later tied to the VRF instance.
The OSPFv2 process evaluates the network commands in the order they are configured. Assign the network address that is most explicit first to include all subnets of that address. For example, if you assign the network address 10.0.0.0 /8, you cannot assign the network address 10.1.0.0 /16 because it is already included in the first network address.
configure 3. Enter ROUTER OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] Process ID is the ID assigned when configuring OSPFv2 globally. 4. Configure the area as a stub area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area.
○ For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 (for example, passive-interface vlan 2222 ). The keyword default sets all interfaces on this OSPF process as passive. To remove the passive interface from select interfaces, use the no passive-interface interface command while passive interface default is configured. To enable both receiving and sending routing updates, use the no passive-interface interface command.
Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces. Some interface parameter values must be consistent across all interfaces to avoid routing errors. For example, set the same time interval for the hello packets on all routers in the OSPF network to prevent misconfiguration of OSPF neighbors. To change OSPFv2 parameters on the interfaces, use any or all of the following commands.
The bold lines in the example show the change on the interface. The change is reflected in the OSPF configuration. Enabling OSPFv2 Authentication To enable or change various OSPF authentication parameters, use the following commands. ● Set a clear text authentication scheme on the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf authentication-key key Configure a key that is a text string no longer than eight characters. All neighboring routers must share password to exchange OSPF information.
Use the show ip ospf process-id virtual-links command to view the virtual link. Dell#show ip ospf 1 virtual-links Virtual Link to router 192.168.253.5 is up Run as demand circuit Transit area 0.0.0.1, via interface TengigabitEthernet 13/16, Cost of using 2 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State POINT_TO_POINT, Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:02 Dell# Creating Filter Routes To filter routes, use prefix lists.
○ ○ ○ ○ metric metric-value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. metric-type metric-type: 1 for OSPF external route type 1. 2 for OSPF external route type 2. route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map. tag tag-value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. To view the current OSPF configuration, use the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode. DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.1.2.32 0.0.0.255 area 2.2.2.
debug ip ospf process-id [event | packet | spf | database-timers rate-limit] To view debug messages for a specific OSPF process ID, use the debug ip ospf process-id command. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies to the first OSPF process. To ○ ○ ○ ○ view debug messages for a specific operation, enter one of the optional keywords: event: view OSPF event messages. packet: view OSPF packet information. spf: view SPF information. database-timers rate-limit: view the LSAs currently in the queue.
OSPF Area 0 — Te 1/1 and 1/2 OSPF Area 0 — Te 3/1 and 3/2 OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 OSPFv3 NSSA NSSA (Not-So-Stubby-Area) is a stub area that does not support Type-5 LSAs, but supports Type-7 LSAs to forward external links. Initially ASBR (Autonomous System Border Router) forwards the external links through Type-7 LSAs to the Area Border Router (ABR) of NSSA, which in turn converts them into Type-5 LSAs and forwards them to the rest of the OSPF domain.
Example DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 router ospf 1 DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#timer spf 2 5 msec DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#show config ! ipv6 router ospf 1 timers spf 2 5 msec DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# DellEMC(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#end DellEMC# Enabling IPv6 Unicast Routing To enable IPv6 unicast routing, use the following command. ● Enable IPv6 unicast routing globally.
Assigning Area ID on an Interface To assign the OSPFv3 process to an interface, use the following command. The ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on an interface and places the interface in the specified area. Additionally, the command creates the OSPFv3 process with ID on the router. OSPFv2 requires two commands to accomplish the same tasks — the router ospf command to create the OSPF process, then the network area command to enable OSPFv2 on an interface.
Configuring Passive-Interface To suppress the interface’s participation on an OSPFv3 interface, use the following command. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface. ● Specify whether some or all some of the interfaces are passive. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode passive-interface {interface-type} Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers. IPsec is a set of protocols developed by the internet engineering task force (IETF) to support secure exchange of packets at the IP layer. IPsec supports two encryption modes: transport and tunnel. ● Transport mode — encrypts only the data portion (payload) of each packet, but leaves the header untouched.
○ ESP with non-null encryption is supported for full confidentiality. ○ 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL encryption algorithms are supported; encrypted and unencrypted keys are supported. NOTE: To encrypt all keys on a router, use the service password-encryption command in Global Configuration mode. However, this command does not provide a high level of network security.
The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link. ● Enable IPsec encryption for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6-based interface.
○ key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). ● Remove an IPSec authentication policy from an OSPFv3 area.
show crypto ipsec policy [name name] ○ name: displays configuration details about a specified policy. ● Display security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router.
Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios. NOTE: The following troubleshooting section is meant to be a comprehensive list, but only to provide some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
36 Pay As You Grow The Pay As You Grow (PAYG) software feature allows you to purchase a Z9500 switch with 36 40G ports (144 10G ports) and upgrade to a larger number of ports as your networking needs grow. A Z9500 switch with a 36 40G-port license has only the ports on line card 0 enabled. See the Port Numbering figure in this section for exact port location.
In the command output, System Service Tag displays the service tag of the switch on which you enter the command. License Service Tag displays the service tag read from the license file. Current State displays the current number of licensed (usable) ports on the switch; Next Boot displays the number of licensed ports on the switch after the next reload.
After you enter the command, the current Z9500 port configuration and license status are displayed. Enter Yes at the prompt to continue the installation; for example: ??? Dell# install license ftp://122.3.12.34:/dell_license/z9500_J_Smith.xml Vendor : Dell Service Tag : XDF-5YU Product : Dell Networking Z9500 Feature(s) : 36 Ports 84 Ports 132 Ports [enabled] [enabled] [disabled] Note: You must reload the chassis to activate a license. Reloading the chassis will affect existing network traffic.
unmounting /usr (mfs:30)... unmounting /force10 (mfs:25)... unmounting /lib (mfs:22)... unmounting /f10 (mfs:19)... unmounting /tmp (mfs:12)... unmounting /kern (kernfs)... unmounting / (/dev/md0a)... done rebooting... Displaying License Information To check the status of the currently installed Z9500 license and display the number of enabled ports, use the show license command. ● Display the license for the current Z9500 port configuration.
Current State : HW-Port-License 132 Ports (Fo 0/0 - Fo 2/188) Next Boot : HW-Port-License 132 Ports (Fo 0/0 - Fo 2/188) You can also display information on the currently If you have installed Z9500 a new license by entering but have not yet reloaded the switch, the following information is displayed. show system brief command. In the Linecard Info section, the Status column displays the licensed ( online ) and unlicensed ( unlicensed ) line cards.
37 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop.
2. The last-hop DR sends a PIM Join message to the RP. All routers along the way, including the RP, create an (*,G) entry in their multicast routing table, and the interface on which the message was received becomes the outgoing interface associated with the (*,G) entry. This process constructs an RPT branch to the RP. 3. If a host on the same subnet as another multicast receiver sends an IGMP report for the same multicast group, the gateway takes no action.
CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. ● ● ● ● Configuring S,G Expiry Timers Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point Configuring a Designated Router Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1. Enable multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing 2. Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
(10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/11, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 0/11 TenGigabitEthernet 0/12 TenGigabitEthernet 1/13 --More-- Configuring S,G Expiry Timers By default, S, G entries expire in 210 seconds. You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries) or configure an expiry time for a particular entry.
interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown DellEMC#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 Overriding Bootstrap Router Updates PIM-SM routers must know the address of the RP for each group for which they have (*,G) entry. This address is obtained automatically through the bootstrap router (BSR) mechanism or a static RP configuration. Use the following command if you have configured a static RP for a group.
Create multicast boundaries and domains by filtering inbound and outbound bootstrap router (BSR) messages per interface. The following command is applied to the subsequent inbound and outbound updates. Timeout removes existing BSR advertisements. ● Create multicast boundaries and domains by filtering inbound and outbound BSR messages per interface. ip pim bsr-border ● Remove candidate RP advertisements.
38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Related Configuration Tasks ● Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim ssm-range acl-name To display address ranges in the PIM-SSM range, use the show ip pim ssm-range command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
1. C-BSRs flood their candidacy throughout the domain in a BSM. Each message contains a BSR priority value, and the C-BSR with the highest priority value becomes the BSR. 2. Each C-RP unicasts periodic Candidate-RP-Advertisements to the BSR. Each message contains an RP priority value and the group ranges for which it is a C-RP. 3. The BSR determines the most efficient and stable group-to-RP mappings, which is called the RP-Set. 4.
39 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Topics: • • • • • Overview Implementing PBR Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group Sample Configuration Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table.
● ● ● ● ● Source IP address and mask Destination IP address and mask Source port Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: ● ● ● ● Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop.
Table 64. Create a Redirect List Command Syntax Command Mode Purpose ip redirect-list redirectlist-name CONFIGURATION Create a redirect list by entering the list name. Format 16 characters. Delete the redirect list using the no ip redirect list command. The following example creates a redirect list by the name of ‘xyz’.
any Any source host host A single source host DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 ? Mask A.B.C.D or /nn Mask in dotted decimal DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 /32 A.B.C.D Destination address any Any destination host host A single destination host DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 /32 Mask A.B.C.D or /nn Mask in dotted decimal DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 /32 DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.
Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group IP redirect lists are supported on physical interfaces as well as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. NOTE: When you apply a redirect-list on a port-channel, when traffic is redirected to the next hop and the destination port-channel is shut down, the traffic is dropped. However, the traffic redirected to the destination port-channel is sometimes switched. To apply a redirect list to an interface, use the following command in Interface mode.
1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 2 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 35 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 5 ip 7.7.7.0/24 8.8.8.0/24, Track 5 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 5) seq 30 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 6 icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Track 5 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 5) seq 35 redirect 42.1.1.2 icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 40 redirect 43.1.1.2 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 30) seq 45 redirect 31.1.
Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirectgroup IP redirect lists are supported on physical interfaces as well as virtual local area network (VLAN) and port-channel interfaces. NOTE: When you apply a redirect-list on a port-channel, when traffic is redirected to the next hop and the destination port-channel is shut down, the traffic is dropped. However, the traffic redirected to the destination port-channel is sometimes switched.
Example: Showing CAM PBR Configuration DellEMC#show cam pbr linecardstack-unit 1 port-set 0 TCP Flag: Bit 5 - URG, Bit 4 - ACK, Bit 3 - PSH, Bit 2 - RST, Bit 1 - SYN, Bit 0 - FIN Cam Port VlanID Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp Next-hop Egress Index Flag Port Port MAC Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------06080 0 N/A IP 0x0 0 0 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.200 199.199.199.199 199.199.199.199 N/A NA 06081 0 N/A TCP 0x10 0 40 234.234.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD Assign Redirect-List GOLD to Interface 2/11 View Redirect-List GOLD Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Redirect IPs Create Track Objects to track the Redirect IPs: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#track 3 ip host 42.1.1.2 reachability DellEMC(conf-track-3)#probe icmp DellEMC(conf-track-3)#track 4 ip host 43.1.1.
Te 2/28 DellEMC# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Tunnel Interfaces Creating steps for Tunnel Interfaces: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel destination 40.1.1.2 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel mode ipip DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel keepalive 60.1.1.2 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip address 60.1.1.
Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: DellEMC#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Nexthop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 20 redirect tunnel 2 track 2 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
40 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
Figure 106. Port Monitoring Configurations Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The platform continues to mirror outgoing traffic even after an MD participating in spanning tree protocol (STP) transitions from the forwarding to blocking. Important Points to Remember ● Port monitoring is supported on physical ports only; virtual local area network (VLAN) and port-channel interfaces do not support port monitoring.
● Source port (MD) can be a VLAN, where the VLAN traffic received on that port pipe where its members are present is monitored ● Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Examples of Port Monitoring In the following examples of port monitoring, the four source ports 0/13, 0/14, 0/15, and 0/16 belong to the same port pipe and mirror traffic to four different destinations (0/1, 0/2, 0/3, and 0/37).
MONITOR SESSION mode source To display information on currently configured port-monitoring sessions, use the show monitor session command from EXEC Privilege mode.
monitor multicast-queue queue-id DellEMC(conf)#monitor multicast-queue 7 2. Verify information about monitor configurations.
Figure 108. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
● Reserved Vlan cannot have untagged ports In the reserved L2 VLAN used for remote port mirroring: ● MAC address learning in the reserved VLAN is automatically disabled. ● The reserved VLAN for remote port mirroring can be automatically configured in intermediate switches by using GVRP. ● There is no restriction on the VLAN IDs used for the reserved remote-mirroring VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs are from 2 to 4094. The default VLAN ID is not supported.
To display the currently configured source and destination sessions for remote port mirroring on a switch, enter the show monitor session command in EXEC Privilege mode.
DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 1 type rpm DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#source te 0/5 destination remote-vlan 10 dir rx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#no disable DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#inte vlan 100 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#tagged te 0/7 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#mode remote-port-mirroring DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged te 0/6 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#exit DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 2 type rpm DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#source vlan 100 destinat
DellEMC(conf-if-vl-10)#tagged te 0/0 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-10)#exit DellEMC(conf)#inte vlan 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#mode remote-port-mirroring DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged te 0/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring DellEMC(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 0/2 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-30)#exit DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 1 type rpm DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#source remote-vlan 10 dest te 0/3 DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#monitor sessio
Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring (ERPM) copies traffic from source ports/port-channels or source VLANs and forwards the traffic using routable GRE-encapsulated packets to the destination IP address specified in the session. NOTE: When configuring ERPM, follow these guidelines ● The Dell EMC Networking OS supports ERPM source session only. Encapsulated packets terminate at the destination IP address or at the analyzer.
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#source port-channel 1 direction tx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#erpm source-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 7.1.1.2 gre-protocol 111 DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-0)#no disable DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 1 type erpm DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#source vlan 11 direction rx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-1)#erpm source-ip 5.1.1.1 dest-ip 3.1.1.
To mitigate this issue, the L2 VLT egress mask drops the duplicate packets that egress out of the VLT port. If the LAG status of the peer VLT device is OPER-UP, then the other VLT peer blocks the transmission of packets received through VLTi to its port or LAG. As a result, the destination port on the device to which the packet analyzer is connected does not receive duplicate mirrored packets.
Table 70. RPM over VLT Scenarios (continued) Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution secondary VLT device through the ICL LAG. The port analyzer is connected to the secondary VLT device. port destination remote vlan direction rx/tx/both.The following example shows the configuration on the secondary VLT device:source remote vlan destination orphan port.
41 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
● Community port — a port that belongs to a community VLAN and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with promiscuous ports. ● Host port — in the context of a private VLAN, is a port in a secondary VLAN: ○ The port must first be assigned that role in INTERFACE mode. ○ A port assigned the host role cannot be added to a regular VLAN. ● Isolated port — a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN.
Configuration Task List The following sections contain the procedures that configure a private VLAN. ● ● ● ● Creating Creating Creating Creating PVLAN Ports a Primary VLAN a Community VLAN an Isolated VLAN Creating PVLAN ports PVLAN ports are ports that will be assigned to the PVLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2. Enable the port. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Set the port in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/2)#switchport mode private-vlan host DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-po-10)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous Creating a Primary VLAN A primary VLAN is a port-based VLAN that is specifically enabled as a primary VLAN to contain the promiscuous ports and PVLAN trunk ports for the private VLAN. A primary VLAN also contains a mapping to secondary VLANs, which comprise community VLANs and isolated VLANs. 1.
2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode community 4. Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add host (isolated) ports to the VLAN.
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 109. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: ● Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. ● Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. ● Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
● The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500. ● For transmission between switches, tagged packets originating from host PVLAN ports in one secondary VLAN and destined for host PVLAN ports in the other switch travel through the promiscuous ports in the local VLAN 4000 and then through the trunk ports (1/25 in each switch). Inspecting the Private VLAN Configuration The standard methods of inspecting configurations also apply in PVLANs.
Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM * 1 100 P 200 I 201 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports primary VLAN in PVLAN T Te 0/19-20 isolated VLAN in VLAN 200 T Te 0/21 The following example shows viewing a private VLAN configuration.
42 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Figure 110. Per-VLAN Spanning Tree The Dell EMC Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 71. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking OS Supports Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .
3. Enable PVST+. 4. Optionally, for load balancing, select a nondefault bridge-priority for a VLAN.
Figure 111. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. ● Assign a bridge priority.
Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.375 , designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 2 BPDU sent 1159, received 632 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 385 (TengigabitEthernet 1/32) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.385 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
Table 72.
● Enable EdgePort on an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree pvst edge-port [bpduguard | shutdown-on-violation] The EdgePort status of each interface is given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: Regarding the bpduguard shutdown-on-violation command behavior: ● If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware.
Figure 112. PVST+ with Extend System ID ● Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TengigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TengigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TengigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TengigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TengigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! inte
43 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 73.
Table 73. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Support for Port-Based, Policy-Based Features (continued) Feature Direction Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 113.
• • SNMP Support for Buffer Statistics Tracking Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN Priority-tagged frames are 802.1Q tagged frames with VLAN ID 0. For VLAN classification, these packets are treated as untagged. However, the dot1p value is still honored when you configure service-class dynamic dot1p or trust dot1p. When priority-tagged frames ingress an untagged port or hybrid port, the frames are classified to the default VLAN of the port and to a queue according to their dot1p priority if you configure service-class dynamic dotp or trust dot1p.
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 114. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell EMC Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them.
class-map match-any 2. Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL. NOTE: Within a class-map, the match rules are installed in the sequence number order. 4. Link the class-map to a queue.
3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match mac After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4. Link the class-map to a queue. POLICY MAP mode service-queue Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface To process Layer 3 packets that contain a dot1p (IEEE 802.
4. Create a QoS input policy. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#qos-policy-input pp_qospolicy 5. Configure the DSCP value to be set on matched packets. QOS-POLICY-IN mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)#set ip-dscp 5 6. Create an input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#policy-map-input pp_policmap 7. Create a service queue to associate the class map and QoS policy map.
DellEMC#show running-config ACL ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB1 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.2 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.3 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.
Creating an Input QoS Policy To create an input QoS policy, use the following steps. 1. Create a Layer 3 input QoS policy. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-input Create a Layer 2 input QoS policy by specifying the keyword layer2 after the qos-policy-input command. 2.
Scheduler Strict — Policy-based Strict-priority Queueing configuration is done through scheduler strict. It is applied to Qos-policy-output. When scheduler strict is applied to multiple Queues, high queue number takes precedence. Allocating Bandwidth to Queue Specifying WRED Drop Precedence Strict-Priority Queuing You can configure strict-priority queueing in an output QoS policy. Strict-priority means that the system de-queues all packets from the assigned queue before servicing any other queues.
● Specify a WRED profile to yellow and/or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred For more information, refer to Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic. Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output. Creating Input Policy Maps There are two types of input policy-maps: Layer 3 and Layer 2. 1. Create a Layer 3 input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map-input Create a Layer 2 input policy map by specifying the keyword layer2 with the policy-map-input command. 2.
Table 75. Default DSCP to Queue Mapping (continued) DSCP/CP hex range (XXX)xxx DSCP Definition Traditional IP Precedence Internal Queue ID DSCP/CP decimal 101XXX EF (Expedited Forwarding) CRITIC/ECP 2 32–47 100XXX AF4 (Assured Forwarding) Flash Override 2 32–47 011XXX AF3 Flash 1 16–31 010XXX AF2 Immediate 1 16–31 001XXX AF1 Priority 0 0–15 000XXX BE (Best Effort) Best Effort 0 0–15 ● Enable the trust DSCP feature.
Guaranteeing Bandwidth to dot1p-Based Service Queues To guarantee bandwidth to dot1p-based service queues, use the following command. Apply this command in the same way as the bandwidth-percentage command in an output QoS policy (refer to Allocating Bandwidth to Queue). The bandwidth-percentage command in QOS-POLICY-OUT mode supersedes the service-class bandwidth-percentage command. ● Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to queues globally.
Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command. ● Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy output You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it. DSCP Color Maps This section describes how to configure color maps and how to display the color map and color map configuration.
Create the DSCP color map profile, bat-enclave-map, with a yellow drop precedence , and set the DSCP values to 9,10,11,13,15,16 DellEMC(conf)# qos dscp-color-map bat-enclave-map DellEMC(conf-dscp-color-map)# dscp yellow 9,10,11,13,15,16 DellEMC(conf-dscp-color-map)# exit Assign the color map, bat-enclave-map to the interface. Displaying DSCP Color Maps To display DSCP color maps, use the show qos dscp-color-map command in EXEC mode. Examples for Creating a DSCP Color Map Display all DSCP color maps.
You can optionally include overhead fields in rate metering calculations by enabling QoS rate adjustment. QoS rate adjustment is disabled by default. ● Specify the number of bytes of packet overhead to include in rate limiting, policing, and shaping calculations. CONFIGURATION mode qos-rate-adjust overhead-bytes For example, to include the Preamble and SFD, type qos-rate-adjust 8. For variable length overhead fields, know the number of bytes you want to include. The default is disabled.
Figure 115. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Table 77. Pre-Defined WRED Profiles Default Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold Maximum Drop Rate wred_drop 0 0 100 wred_teng_y 594 5941 100 wred_teng_g 594 5941 50 wred_fortyg_y 594 5941 50 wred_fortyg_g 594 5941 25 Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1. Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2.
● Assign a WRED profile to either yellow or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred Displaying Default and Configured WRED Profiles To display the default and configured WRED profiles, use the following command. ● Display default and configured WRED profiles and their threshold values. EXEC mode show qos wred-profile Displaying WRED Drop Statistics To display WRED drop statistics, use the following command. ● Display the number of packets Dell EMC Networking OS the WRED profile drops.
0 0 0 15 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 MCAST 0 DellEMC# Explicit Congestion Notification Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) enhances and extends WRED functionality by marking packets for later transmission instead of dropping them when a threshold value is exceeded. Use ECN for WRED to reduce the packet transmission rate in a congested, heavily-loaded network.
When you use ECN to classify and color-mark packets in an ingress class map, take into account: ● When all matching packets are marked for yellow treatment, policer-based coloring is not supported at the same time. ● If a single-rate two-color policer is configured at the same time as ECN-matched packets are set for yellow handling, by default all packets less than PIR are marked for “green” handling.
service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 The second example shows how to achieve the desired configuration by specifying ECN match criteria to classify ECN-capable packets: ip access-list standard dscp_50_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ecn 3 ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ec
You can enable WRED and ECN capabilities per queue for granularity. You can disable these functionality per queue, and you can also specify the minimum and maximum buffer thresholds for each color-coding of the packets. You can configure maximum drop rate percentage of yellow and green profiles. You can set up these parameters for both front-end and backplane ports. Global Service Pools With WRED and ECN Settings Support for global service pools is now available.
average queue size determines when packets are marked for later transmission and when the transmission rate is reduced on an interface during times of network congestion. For example, in a best-effort network topology that uses WRED with instantaneous ECN, data packets may be transmitted at a rate in which latency or throughput are not maintained at an effective, optimal level. Packets are dropped when the network experiences a large traffic load according to the configured WRED thresholds.
● When WRED is configured on a global service-pool (regardless of whether ECN is configured on the global service-pool), and one or more queues have WRED enabled and ECN disabled, WRED is effective for the minimum threshold between the queue threshold and the service-pool threshold. ● When WRED is configured on the global service-pool (regardless of whether ECN is configured on the global service-pool), and one or more queues are enabled with both WRED and ECN, ECN marking takes effect.
1. Configure the weight factor for the computation of average-queue size. This weight value applies to front-end ports. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-out)#wred—profile weight number 2. Configure a WRED profile, and specify the threshold and maximum drop rate. WRED mode DellEMC(conf-wred) #wred—profile thresh-1 DellEMC(conf-wred) #threshold min 100 max 200 max-drop-rate 40 3. Configure another WRED profile, and specify the threshold and maximum drop rate.
The test cam-usage command allows you to verify that there are enough available CAM entries before applying a policy-map to an interface so that you avoid exceeding the QoS CAM space and partial configurations. This command measures the size of the specified policy-map and compares it to the available CAM space in a partition for a specified port-pipe.
Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking You can enable the tracking of statistical values of buffer spaces at a global level. The buffer statistics tracking utility operates in the max use count mode that enables the collection of maximum values of counters. To configure the buffer statistics tracking utility, perform the following step: 1. Enable the buffer statistics tracking utility and enter the Buffer Statistics Snapshot configuration mode.
44 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Table 80. RIP Defaults Feature Default Interfaces running RIP ● Listen to RIPv1 and RIPv2 ● Transmit RIPv1 RIP timers ● ● ● ● Auto summarization Enabled ECMP paths supported 16 update timer = 30 seconds invalid timer = 180 seconds holddown timer = 180 seconds flush timer = 240 seconds Configuration Information By default, RIP is disabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To configure RIP, you must use commands in two modes: ROUTER RIP and INTERFACE.
To view the global RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# When the RIP process has learned the RIP routes, use the show ip rip database command in EXEC mode to view those routes. DellEMC#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.
● Define a specific router to exchange RIP information between it and the Dell EMC Networking system. ROUTER RIP mode neighbor ip-address You can use this command multiple times to exchange RIP information with as many RIP networks as you want. ● Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving RIP routing information.
Setting the Send and Receive Version To change the RIP version globally or on an interface in Dell EMC Networking OS, use the following command. To specify the RIP version, use the version command in ROUTER RIP mode. To set an interface to receive only one or the other version, use the ip rip send version or the ip rip receive version commands in INTERFACE mode. You can set one RIP version globally on the system using system.
If you must perform routing between discontiguous subnets, disable automatic summarization. With automatic route summarization disabled, subnets are advertised. The autosummary command requires no other configuration commands. To disable automatic route summarization, enter no autosummary in ROUTER RIP mode. NOTE: If you enable the ip split-horizon command on an interface, the system does not advertise the summarized address.
RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names. The examples are divided into the following groups of command sequences: ● Configuring RIPv2 on Core 2 ● Core 2 RIP Output ● RIP Configuration on Core 3 ● Core 3 RIP Output ● RIP Configuration Summary Figure 116.
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- ----------- -
network 192.168.2.0 version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)# Core 3 RIP Output The examples in this section show the core 2 RIP output. ● To display Core 3 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. ● To display Core 3 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. ● To display Core 3 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 3.
45 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
[no] rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold [value event-number] falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] OR [no] rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] Configure the alarm using the following optional parameters: ○ number: alarm number, an integer from 1 to 65,535, the value must be unique in the RMON Alarm Table.
this command. This configuration also generates an SNMP trap when the event is triggered using the SNMP community string “eventtrap”. DellEMC(conf)#rmon event 1 log trap eventtrap description “High ifOutErrors” owner nms1 Configuring RMON Collection Statistics To enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the RMON collection statistics command in INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode. ● Enable RMON MIB statistics collection.
46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP).
● ● ● ● ● Influencing RSTP Root Selection Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Important Points to Remember ● RSTP is disabled by default. ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. ● All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology.
Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. ● Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. To enable RSTP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the following commands. 1.
To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. DellEMC#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Te 3/4 R3# Altr 128.684 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No Adding and Removing Interfaces To add and remove interfaces, use the following commands. To add an interface to the Rapid Spanning Tree topology, configure it for Layer 2 and it is automatically added. If you previously disabled RSTP on the interface using the command no spanning-tree 0 command, re-enable it using the spanning-tree 0 command. ● Remove an interface from the Rapid Spanning Tree topology.
hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell EMC Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. ● Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
○ priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535. The lower the number assigned, the more likely this bridge becomes the root bridge. The default is 32768. Entries must be multiples of 4096. A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned. The following example example shows the console message after the bridge-priority command is used to make R2 the root bridge (shown in bold). DellEMC(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 04:27:59: %RPM0-P:RP2 %SPANMGR-5-STP_ROOT_CHANGE: RSTP root changed.
Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed. To achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster, use RSTP fast hellos. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed.
47 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
● Displaying Accounting for User Roles ● Displaying Information About Roles Logged into the Switch ● Display Role Permissions Assigned to a Command Overview of RBAC With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function.
You could also use the default authentication method to apply to all the LINES; for example, console port and VTY. NOTE: The authentication method list must be in the same order as the authorization method list. For example, if you configure the authentication method list in the following order—TACACS+, local—Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring the authorization method list in the same order—TACACS+, local. 4. Specify the authorization method list—RADIUS, TACACS+, or Local.
User Roles This section describes how to create a new user role and configure command permissions and contains the following topics. ● Creating a New User Role ● Modifying Command Permissions for Roles ● Adding and Deleting Users from a Role Creating a New User Role Instead of using the system defined user roles, you can create a new user role that best matches your organization. When you create a new user role, you can first inherit permissions from one of the system defined roles.
Modifying Command Permissions for Roles You can modify (add or delete) command permissions for newly created user roles and system defined roles using the role mode { { { addrole | deleterole } role-name } | reset } command command in Configuration mode. NOTE: You cannot modify system administrator command permissions. If you add or delete command permissions using the role command, those changes only apply to the specific user role. They do not apply to other roles that have inheritance from that role.
The following example shows that the secadmin role can now access Interface mode (highlighted in bold). Role Inheritance netoperator netadmin secadmin sysadmin Modes Exec Config Interface Router IP RouteMap Protocol MAC Exec Config Interface Line Exec Config Interface Line Router IP RouteMap Protocol MAC Example: Remove Security Administrator Access to Line Mode.
The following example adds a user, to the secadmin user role. DellEMC(conf)# username john role secadmin password 0 password AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles This section describes how to configure AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.
Examples of Applying a Method List The following configuration example applies a method list: TACACS+, RADIUS and local: ! radius-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! tacacs-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! aaa authentication login ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa authorization exec ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa start-stop tacacs+ ! The following configuration example applies a method list other than default to each VTY line.
Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell EMC Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendorspecific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell EMC Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
Applying an Accounting Method to a Role To apply an accounting method list to a role executed by a user with that user role, use the accounting command in LINE mode. accounting {exec | commands {level | role role-name}} method-list Example of Applying an Accounting Method to a Role The following example applies the accounting default method to the user role secadmin (security administrator).
line route-map router Line Configuration mode Route map configuration mode Router configuration mode DellEMC#show role mode configure username Role access: sysadmin DellEMC##show role mode configure password-attributes Role access: secadmin,sysadmin DellEMC#show role mode configure interface Role access: netadmin, sysadmin DellEMC#show role mode configure line Role access: netadmin,sysadmin Displaying Information About Users Logged into the Switch To display information on all users logged into the switc
● Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands | exec | suppress | system level} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} The variables are: ○ system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration. ○ exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. ○ command level: sends accounting of commands executed at the specified privilege level.
accounting exec execAcct DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting commands 15 com15 DellEMC(config-line-vty)# accounting exec execAcct Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell EMC Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting. To obtain accounting records displaying information about users currently logged in, use the following command.
Configuring AAA Authentication Login Methods To configure an authentication method and method list, use the following commands. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: If you use a method list on the console port in which RADIUS or TACACS is the last authentication method, and the server is not reachable, Dell EMC Networking OS allows access even though the username and password credentials cannot be verified.
CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs 2. Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host x.x.x.x key some-password 3. Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host x.x.x.x key some-password To get enable authentication from the RADIUS server and use TACACS as a backup, issue the following commands. The following example shows enabling authentication from the RADIUS server.
Example: DellEMC(config)#aaa authentication login vty_auth_list radius Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? 3. You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate whenever there is a change in the RADIUS server list.. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host IP Address Example: DellEMC(config)#radius-server host 192.100.0.12 Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? DellEMC(config)#no radius-server host 192.100.0.
● Privilege level 1 — is the default level for EXEC mode. At this level, you can interact with the router, for example, view some show commands and Telnet and ping to test connectivity, but you cannot configure the router. This level is often called the “user” level. One of the commands available in Privilege level 1 is the enable command, which you can use to enter a specific privilege level. ● Privilege level 0 — contains only the end, enable, and disable commands.
Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell EMC Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell EMC Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level. You can always change a password for any privilege level. To change to a different privilege level, enter the enable command, then the privilege level.
3. Configure level and commands for a mode or reset a command’s level. CONFIGURATION mode privilege mode {level level command | reset command} Configure the following required and optional parameters: ● mode: enter a keyword for the modes (exec, configure, interface, line, route-map, or router) ● level level: the range is from 0 to 15. Levels 0, 1, and 15 are pre-configured. Levels 2 to 14 are available for custom configuration. ● command: an Dell EMC Networking OS CLI keyword (up to five keywords allowed).
snmp-server Modify SNMP parameters DellEMC(conf)# Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password authentication of all users on different terminal lines. The user’s privilege level is the same as the privilege level assigned to the terminal line, unless a more specific privilege level is assigned to the user. To specify a password for the terminal line, use the following commands. ● Configure a custom privilege level for the terminal lines.
8. Copy the startup-config into the running-config. 9. To display the content of the startup-config, remove the previous authentication configuration and set the new authentication parameters. The rest of the previous configuration is preserved. Version 2.00.1201. Copyright (C) 2017 American Megatrends, Inc. EVALUATION COPY. Press or to enter setup. Grub 1.99~rc1 (Dell Force10) Built by root at bsdlab on Thu_Aug_18_06:51:21_UTC_2011 Z9000 Boot selector Label 3.0.1.1 NetBoot Label 0.0.0.
● Privilege Levels After gaining authorization for the first time, you may configure these attributes. NOTE: RADIUS authentication/authorization is done for every login. There is no difference between first-time login and subsequent logins. Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout.
For a complete listing of all Dell EMC Networking OS commands related to RADIUS, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide. NOTE: RADIUS authentication and authorization are done in a single step. Hence, authorization cannot be used independent of authentication. However, if you have configured RADIUS authorization and have not configured authentication, a message is logged stating this.
○ retransmit retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3. ○ timeout seconds: the range is from 0 to 1000. Default is 5 seconds. ○ key [encryption-type] key: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text, and a string for the key. The key can be up to 42 characters long. This key must match the key configured on the RADIUS server host. If you do not configure these optional parameters, the global default values for all RADIUS host are applied.
Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol Support for RADIUS Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAPv2) with RADIUS authentication. RADIUS is used to authenticate Telnet, SSH, console, REST, and OMI access to the switch based on the AAA configuration. By default, the RADIUS client in the switch uses PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) for sending the login credentials to the RADIUS server.
Change of Authorization (CoA) packets Using the CoA packets, the NAS can handle authorization of dot1x sessions by processing the following requests from the Dynamic Authorization Client (DAC): Re-authentication of the supplicant, Port disable, and Port bounce. The CoA packets constitute one message request (CoA request) and one of the following two possible responses: ● Change of Authorization Acknowledgement (CoA-Ack) - If the authorization state change is successful, then NAS sends a CoA-Ack.
Table 86.
CoA Packet Processing This section lists various actions that the NAS performs during CoA packet processing. The following activities are performed by NAS: ● responds with CoA-Nak, if no matching session is found for the session identification attributes in CoA; Error-Cause value is “Session Context Not Found” (503). ● responds with CoA-Nak, for any internal processing error in NAS; Error-Cause value is “Resources Unavailable” (506).
○ Request Authenticator ○ Attributes Disconnect Message Processing This section lists various actions that the NAS performs during DM processing. The following activities are performed by NAS: ● responds with DM-Nak, if no matching session is found in NAS for the session identification attributes in DM; Error-Cause value is “Session Context Not Found” (503). ● responds with DM-Nak for any internal processing error in NAS; Error-Cause value is “Resources Unavailable” (506).
Disconnecting administrative users logged in through RADIUS Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to configure disconnect messages (DMs) to disconnect RADIUS administrative users who are logged in through an AAA interface. Before disconnecting an administrative user using the disconnect messages, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: ● Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC. ● NAS server listens on the Management IP UDP port 3799 (default) or the port configured through CLI.
Configuring CoA to re-authenticate 802.1x sessions Dell EMC Networking OS provides RADIUS extension commands that enables you to configure re-authentication of 802.1x user sessions. When you configure this feature, the DAC sends the CoA request to re-authenticate the 802.1x uer session when ever the authorization level of the user’s profile changes. Before configuring re-authentication of 802.1x sessions, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: ● Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC.
NAS terminates the 802.1x user session without disabling the physical port. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)terminate-session NAS takes the following actions whenever session termination is triggered: ● validates the DM request and the session identification attributes. ● sends a DM-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the DM request does not contain the calling-station-id and NAS-port attributes.
● The NAS VLT secondary chassis member processes the RADIUS dynamic authorization message authorizing non-PE Control Bridge (CB) ports locally. RPM failover scenario This section describes how the NAS handles virtual IP failovers to the secondary RPM. ● The NAS Route Processor Module (RPM) processes the RADIUS dynamic authorization message only if the role of RPM is active.
TACACS+ Dell EMC Networking OS supports terminal access controller access control system (TACACS+ client, including support for login authentication. Configuration Task List for TACACS+ The following list includes the configuration task for TACACS+ functions.
! aaa authentication enable default tacacs+ enable aaa authentication enable LOCAL enable tacacs+ aaa authentication login default tacacs+ local aaa authentication login LOCAL local tacacs+ aaa authorization exec default tacacs+ none aaa authorization commands 1 default tacacs+ none aaa authorization commands 15 default tacacs+ none aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+ aaa accounting commands 1 default start-stop tacacs+ aaa accounting commands 15 default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(
DellEMC(conf)#aaa authentication exec tacacsauthorization tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)#tacacs-server host 25.1.1.2 key Force DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#line vty 0 9 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#login authentication tacacsmethod DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end Specifying a TACACS+ Server Host To specify a TACACS+ server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. ● Enter the host name or IP address of the TACACS+ server host.
Protection from TCP Tiny and Overlapping Fragment Attacks Tiny and overlapping fragment attack is a class of attack where configured ACL entries — denying TCP port-specific traffic — is bypassed and traffic is sent to its destination although denied by the ACL. RFC 1858 and 3128 proposes a countermeasure to the problem. This countermeasure is configured into the line cards and enabled by default.
Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image To use secure copy (SCP) to copy a software image through an SSH connection from one switch to another, use the following commands. 1. On Switch 1, set the SSH port number ( port 22 by default). CONFIGURATION MODE ip ssh server port number 2. On Switch 1, enable SSH. CONFIGURATION MODE copy ssh server enable 3. On Switch 2, invoke SCP. CONFIGURATION MODE copy scp: flash: 4.
To remove the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location, use the crypto key zeroize rsa command in CONFIGURATION mode. DellEMC(conf)#crypto key zeroize rsa Configuring When to Re-generate an SSH Key You can configure the time-based or volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. If both threshold types are configured, the session rekeys when either one of the thresholds is reached.
Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Server To configure the HMAC algorithm for the SSH server, use the ip ssh server mac hmac-algorithm command in CONFIGURATION mode. hmac-algorithm: Enter a space-delimited list of keyed-hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server.
Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list. DellEMC(conf)# ip ssh mac hmac-sha1-96 Configuring the SSH Server Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH server, use the ip ssh server cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode. cipher-list-: Enter a space-delimited list of ciphers the SSH server will support. The following ciphers are available.
Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell (SSH) is enabled by default using the SSH Password Authentication method. Enabling SSH Authentication by Password Authenticate an SSH client by prompting for a password when attempting to connect to the Dell EMC Networking system. This setup is the simplest method of authentication and uses SSH version 1. To enable SSH password authentication, use the following command. ● Enable SSH password authentication.
Configuring Host-Based SSH Authentication Authenticate a particular host. This method uses SSH version 2. To configure host-based authentication, use the following commands. 1. Configure RSA Authentication. Refer to Using RSA Authentication of SSH. 2. Create shosts by copying the public RSA key to the file shosts in the directory .ssh, and write the IP address of the host to the file. cp /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.pub /.ssh/shosts Refer to the first example. 3.
Using Client-Based SSH Authentication To SSH from the chassis to the SSH client, use the following command. This method uses SSH version 1 or version 2. If the SSH port is a non-default value, use the ip ssh server port number command to change the default port number. You may only change the port number when SSH is disabled. Then use the -p option with the ssh command. ● SSH from the chassis to the SSH client. ssh ip_address DellEMC#ssh 10.16.127.
Table 89. VTY Access (continued) Authentication Method VTY access-class support? Username access-class support? Remote authorization support? RADIUS YES NO YES (with version 6.1.1.0 and later) provides several ways to configure access classes for VTY lines, including: ● VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization ● VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization retrieves the access class from the local database. To 1. 2. 3. 4.
DellEMC(conf)#tacacs-server host 256.1.1.2 key Force10 DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#line vty 0 9 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#login authentication tacacsmethod DellEMC(config-line-vty)# DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class deny10 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end (same applies for radius and line authentication) VTY MAC-SA Filter Support supports MAC access lists which permit or deny users based on their source MAC address. With this approach, you can implement a security policy based on the source MAC address.
Configuring Challenge Response Authentication for SSHv2 To configure challenge response authentication for SSHv2, perform the following steps: 1. Enable challenge response authentication for SSHv2. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh challenge-response-authentication enable 2. View the configuration. EXEC mode show ip ssh DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : aes256-ctr,aes256-cbc,aes192-ctr,aes192-cbc,aes128ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc.
Table 90. Suppressed ICMP message types (continued) ICMPv4 message types All sub types of destination unreachable (3) Source quench (4) Redirect (5) Router advertisement (9) Router solicitation (10) Time exceeded (11) IP header bad (12) Timestamp request (13) Timestamp reply (14) Information request (15) Information reply (16) Address mask request (17) Address mask reply (18) NOTE: The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the ICMP message type echo request (8). Table 91.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● Neighbor solicitation (135) Neighbor advertisement (136) Redirect (137) Router renumbering (138) MLD v2 listener report (143) Duplicate Address Request (157) Duplicate Address Confirmation (158) Dell EMC Networking OS Security Hardening The security of a network consists of multiple factors. Apart from access to the device, best practices, and implementing various security features, security also lies with the integrity of the device.
verified boot hash startup—config hash-value NOTE: The verified boot hash command is only applicable for the startup configuration file in the local file system. After enabling and configuring startup configuration verification, the device verifies the hash checksum of the startup configuration during every reload. DellEMC# verified boot hash startup—config 619A8C1B7A2BC9692A221E2151B9DA9E Configuring the root User Password For added security, you can change the root user password.
48 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Provider Backbone Bridging VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.
Figure 118. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember ● Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. ● Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports Debugging VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. ● Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports 802.1ad trunk ports may also be tagged members of a VLAN so that it can carry single and double-tagged traffic. You can enable trunk ports to carry untagged, single-tagged, and double-tagged VLAN traffic by making the trunk port a hybrid port. To configure trunk ports, use the following commands. 1. Configure a trunk port to carry untagged, single-tagged, and double-tagged traffic by making it a hybrid port. INTERFACE mode portmode hybrid 2.
For example, if you configure TPID 0x9100, the system treats 0x8100 and untagged traffic the same and maps both types to the default VLAN, as shown by the frame originating from Building C. For the same traffic types, if you configure TPID 0x8100, the system is able to differentiate between 0x8100 and untagged traffic and maps each to the appropriate VLAN, as shown by the packet originating from Building A.
Figure 120.
Figure 121. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Table 92. Drop Eligibility Behavior (continued) Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. ● Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired. When an S-Tag is added to incoming customer frames, the 802.1p bits on the S-Tag may be configured statically for each customer or derived from the C-Tag using Dynamic Mode CoS. Dynamic Mode CoS maps the C-Tag 802.1p value to a S-Tag 802.1p value. Figure 122.
Mapping C-Tag to S-Tag dot1p Values To map C-Tag dot1p values to S-Tag dot1p values and mark the frames accordingly, use the following commands. 1. Allocate CAM space to enable queuing frames according to the C-Tag or the S-Tag. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number ecfmacl number {vman-qos | vman-qos-dual-fp} number ● vman-qos: mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the original C-Tag dot1p.
Figure 123. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
Figure 124. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information ● L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs. ● No protocol packets are tunneled when you enable VLAN stacking. ● L2PT requires the default CAM profile. Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1. Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2.
INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses a Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command. ● Overwrite the BPDU with a user-specified destination MAC address when BPDUs are tunneled across the provider network.
originally specified in 802.1Q. Only bridges in the service provider network use this destination MAC address so these bridges treat BPDUs originating from the customer network as normal data frames, rather than consuming them. The same is true for GARP VLAN registration protocol (GVRP). 802.
49 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
● If the global sampling rate is non-default, for example 256, and if the sampling rate is not configured on the interface, the sampling rate of the interface is the global non-default sampling rate, that is, 256. To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured.
NOTE: Interface mode configuration takes priority. ● To reset the maximum header size of a packet, use the following command [no] sflow max-header-size extended ● View the maximum header size of a packet.
show sflow The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled. DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
Changing the Polling Intervals The sflow polling-interval command configures the polling interval for an interface in the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of counters sent to the collector. This command changes the global default counter polling (20 seconds) interval. You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval. To configure the polling intervals globally (in CONFIGURATION mode) or by interface (in INTERFACE mode), use the following command.
The bold line shows that extended sFlow settings are enabled on all three types. DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 4096 Global default counter polling interval: 15 Global extended information enabled: gateway, router, switch 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 10.10.10.3, Agent IP addr: 10.10.0.
Table 93. Extended Gateway Summary (continued) IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description Version 7.8.1.0 allows extended gateway information in cases where the source and destination IP addresses are learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where is source is reachable over ECMP. BGP BGP Exported Exported Extended gateway data is packed.
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
MIBs are hierarchically structured and use object identifiers to address managed objects, but managed objects also have a textual name called an object descriptor. You can download the latest MIB files from the following path: ● https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/SupportMain.aspx. Implementation Information The following describes SNMP implementation information.
Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell EMC Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models. The primary difference between the two versions is that version 2 supports two additional protocol operations (informs operation and snmpgetbulk query) and one additional object (counter64 object). SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is a user-based security model that provides password authentication for user security and encryption for data security and privacy.
● Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write view privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. ● Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password ● Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only).
In the following example, the value “4” displays in the OID before the IP address for IPv4. For an IPv6 IP address, a value of “16” displays. > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 sysUpTime.0 DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (32852616) 3 days, 19:15:26.16 > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 The following example shows reading the value of the next managed object. > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.
The default is None. ● (From a management station) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number). CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysContact.0 s “contact-info” You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None. ● (From a management station) Identify the physical location of the system (for example, San Jose, 350 Holger Way, 1st floor lab, rack A1-1).
snmp linkdown snmp linkup PORT_LINKDN:changed interface state to down:%d PORT_LINKUP:changed interface state to up:%d Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps You can enable a subset of Dell EMC Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps using one of the following listed command options. To enable a subset of Dell EMC Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps, use the following command. ● Enable a subset of SNMP traps.
Following is the sample audit log message that other syslog servers that are reachable receive: Oct 21 00:46:13: dv-fedgov-s4810-6: %EVL-6-NOT_REACHABLE:Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable Following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is resumed: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (10230) 0:01:42.30 SNMPv2MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.
Table 95. MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object OID Object Values Description copyDestFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5 1 = Dell EMC Networking OS file Specifies the type of file to copy to. ● If copySourceFileType is running-config or startup-config, the default copyDestFileLocation is flash. ● If copyDestFileType is a binary, you must specify copyDestFileLocation and copyDestFileName. 2 = running-config 3 = startup-config copyDestFileLocation .1.3.6.
● index must be unique to all previously executed snmpset commands. If an index value has been used previously, a message like the following appears. In this case, increment the index value and enter the command again. Error in packet. Reason: notWritable (that object does not support modification) Failed object: FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.101 ● To complete the command, use as many MIB objects in the command as required by the MIB object descriptions shown in the previous table.
FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.7 = INTEGER: runningConfig(3) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileType.7 = INTEGER: startupConfig(2) The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using OID. >snmpset -c public -v 2c 10.11.131.162 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2.8 i 3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5.8 i 2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2.8 = INTEGER: 3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5.
> snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.10 i 1 copySrcFileLocation.10 i 4 copyDestFileType.10 i 3 copySrcFileName.10 s /home/myfilename copyServerAddress.10 a 172.16.1.56 copyUserName.10 s mylogin copyUserPassword.10 s mypass Additional MIB Objects to View Copy Statistics Dell EMC Networking provides more MIB objects to view copy statistics, as shown in the following table. Table 96.
NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using this command. The following examples show the command syntax using MIB object names and the same command using the object OIDs. In both cases, the same index number used in the snmpset command follows the object. The following command shows how to get a MIB object value using the object name. > snmpget -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.11.131.140 copyTimeCompleted.110 FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyTimeCompleted.
Table 98. MIB Objects to Display the Information for Power Monitoring MIB Object OID Description envMonSupplyCurrentPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5 Displays per PSU input power (current configuration). envMonSupplyAveragePower 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6 Displays average input power. envMonSupplyAvgStartTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.7 Displays average input-power start time. SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.
● To view the available flash memory using SNMP, use the following command. snmpget -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.6.1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.5.1 = Gauge32: 24 The output above displays that 24% of the flash memory is used. MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system.
enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.1.1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.1.2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.1.3 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.2.1 = = = = "flashmntr" "l2mgr" "vrrp" Hex: 76 72 72 70 "sysd" Hex: 73 79 73 64 The output above displays that the software core files generated by the system.
MIB Support to Display the Available Partitions on Flash Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information of various partitions such as /flash, /tmp, /usr/ pkg, and /f10/ConfD. The dellNetFlashStorageTable table contains the list of all partitions on disk. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 102. MIB Objects to Display the Available Partitions on Flash MIB Object OID Description dellNetFlashPartitionNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.1 Index for the table.
.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.5 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.2 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.
SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1258296320 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.20.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.
SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.
Table 105. MIB Objects for entAliasMappingTable (continued) MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1 Contains information about a particular logical entity. entAliasLogicalIndexOrZero 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.1 Contains a non–zero value and identifies the logical entity named by the same value of entLogicalIndex. entAliasMappingIdentifier 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.
Table 106. MIB Objects for LAG (continued) MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2 Contains a two octet read–write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s system ID. dot3adAggActorSystemID 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3 Contains a six octet read–write MAC address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains the Aggregator. dot3adAggAggregateOrIndividual 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.
iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.5.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.5.
MIB Support to Display Organizational Specific Unrecognized LLDP TLVs The lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable contains organizationally defined information that is not recognized by the local neighbor. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 108. MIB Objects for Displaying Organizational Specific Unrecognized LLDP TLVs MIB Object OID Description lldpRemOrgDefInfoTable 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4 This table contains organizationally defined information that is not recognized by the local neighbor.
Manage VLANs using SNMP The qBridgeMIB managed objects in Q-BRIDGE-MIB, defined in RFC 2674, allows you to use SNMP to manage VLANs. Creating a VLAN To create a VLAN, use the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. The snmpset operation shown in the following example creates VLAN 10 by specifying a value of 4 for instance 10 of the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 123.45.6.78 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.10 i 4 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.1107787786 x "40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.
To set time to wait till bgp session are up set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.3 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.6 Enabling and Disabling a Port using SNMP To enable and disable a port using SNMP, use the following commands. 1. Create an SNMP community on the Dell system. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community 2. From the Dell EMC Networking system, identify the interface index of the port for which you want to change the admin status.
Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on the Default VLAN Using SNMP Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Non-default VLAN Using SNMP Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port-Channel Using SNMP Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number.
Table 110. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A. Chassis MIB chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.12 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition B.
● snmp-server group admingroup 3 auth read readview context cx1 ● snmp-server group admingroup 3 auth read readview context cx2 ● snmp-server user admin admingroup 3 auth md5 helloworld ● snmp mib community-map VRF1 context cx1 ● snmp mib community-map VRF2 context cx2 ● snmp-server view readview .1 included ● snmp-server view writeview .1 included 2. Configure snmp context under the VRF instances. ● sho run bgp ● router bgp 100 ● address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 ● snmp context context1 ● neighbor 20.1.1.
Monitor Port-Channels To check the status of a Layer 2 port-channel, use f10LinkAggMib (.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2). In the following example, Po 1 is a switchport and Po 2 is in Layer 3 mode. Example of SNMP Trap for Monitored Port-Channels [senthilnathan@lithium ~]$ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.11.1.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.1.1.1.1 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.1.1.1.2 = INTEGER: 2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.1.1.2.
Transceiver Monitoring To retrieve and display the transceiver related parameters you can perform a snmpwalk transceiver table OID to retrieve transceiver details as per the MIB. This enables transceiver monitoring and identification of potential issues related to the transceivers on a switch. ● Ensure that SNMP is enabled on the device before running a query to retrieve the transceiver information.
Table 111. SNMP OIDs for Transceiver Monitoring (continued) Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.17 Volltage SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.18 Transmit Bias Current Lane1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.19 Transmit Bias Current Lane2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.20 Transmit Bias Current Lane3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
51 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknownunicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
storm-control multicast packets_per_second in ● Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets. It can be a result of a faulty NIC/Switch that sends spurious PFC/LLFC packets. Configuring Storm Control from CONFIGURATION Mode To configure storm control from CONFIGURATION mode, use the following command.
52 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Related Configuration Tasks ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group Modifying Global Parameters Modifying Interface STP Parameters Enabling PortFast Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard STP Root Guard Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Important Points to Remember ● STP is disabled by default. ● The Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0).
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 125. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default. When you enable STP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the Spanning Tree topology. ● Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge participating in STP is enabled. ● Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. Figure 126.
To view the spanning tree configuration and the interfaces that are participating in STP, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. To confirm that a port is participating in Spanning Tree, use the show spanning-tree 0 brief command from EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show spanning-tree 0 brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e80d.
PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode forward-delay seconds The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. ● Change the hello-time parameter (the BPDU transmission interval). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those with more ports) Dell EMC Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. the default is 2 seconds.
in an Error Disabled state when receiving the BPDU, the physical interface remains up and spanning-tree drops packets in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. CAUTION: Enable PortFast only on links connecting to an end station. PortFast can cause loops if it is enabled on an interface connected to a network. To enable PortFast on an interface, use the following command. ● Enable PortFast on an interface.
Figure 127. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: ● is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. ● drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command. ● Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the root or secondary root.
Figure 128. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: ● Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps individually or collectively, use the following commands. ● Enable SNMP traps for spanning tree state changes. snmp-server enable traps stp ● Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively.
Figure 129. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: ● Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
● When used in a PVST+ network, STP loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN level. If no BPDUs are received on a VLAN interface, the port or port-channel transitions to a Loop-Inconsistent (Blocking) state only for this VLAN. To enable a loop guard on an STP-enabled port or port-channel interface, use the following command. ● Enable loop guard on a port or port-channel interface.
53 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 130.
Enable the SupportAssist service. CONFIGURATION mode support-assist activate DellEMC(conf)#support-assist activate This command guides you through steps to configure SupportAssist. Configuring SupportAssist Manually To manually configure SupportAssist service, use the following commands. 1. Accept the end-user license agreement (EULA). CONFIGURATION mode eula-consent {support-assist} {accept | reject} NOTE: Once accepted, you do not have to accept the EULA again.
support-assist DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)# 3. (Optional) Configure the contact information for the company. SUPPORTASSIST mode contact-company name {company-name}[company-next-name] ... [company-next-name] DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-company name test DellEMC(conf-supportassist-cmpy-test)# 4. (Optional) Configure the contact name for an individual.
[no] activity {full-transfer|core-transfer|event-transfer} DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity full-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity core-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity event-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 2. Copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system.
SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY mode [no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# Configuring SupportAssist Company SupportAssist Company mode allows you to configure name, address and territory information of the company.
[no] contact-person [first ] last DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-person first john last doe DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 2. Configure the email addresses to reach the contact person. SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#email-address primary jdoe@mycompany.com DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 3. Configure phone numbers of the contact person.
[no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 4. Configure the URL to reach the SupportAssist remote server. SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] url uniform-resource-locator DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#url https://192.168.1.1/index.htm DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# Viewing SupportAssist Configuration To view the SupportAssist configurations, use the following commands: 1.
! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1337 DellEMC# 3. Display the EULA for the feature. EXEC Privilege mode show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} DellEMC#show eula-consent support-assist SupportAssist EULA has been: Accepted Additional information about the SupportAssist EULA is as follows: By installing SupportAssist, you allow Dell to save your contact information (e.g.
54 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Protocol Overview The NTP messages to one or more servers and processes the replies as received. The server interchanges addresses and ports, fills in or overwrites certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum, and returns it immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows each client/server peer to determine the timekeeping characteristics of its other peers, including the expected accuracies of their clocks.
To display the system clock state with respect to NTP, use the show ntp status command from EXEC Privilege mode. R6_E300(conf)#do show ntp status Clock is synchronized, stratum 2, reference is 192.168.1.1 frequency is -369.623 ppm, stability is 53.319 ppm, precision is 4294967279 reference time is CD63BCC2.0CBBD000 (16:54:26.049 UTC Thu Mar 12 2009) clock offset is 997.529984 msec, root delay is 0.00098 sec root dispersion is 10.04271 sec, peer dispersion is 10032.
○ ○ ○ ○ For For For For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. To view the configuration, use the show running-config ntp command in EXEC privilege mode (refer to the example in Configuring NTP Authentication).
ntp master To configure the switch as NTP Server use the ntp master command. stratum number identifies the NTP Server's hierarchy. The following example shows configuring an NTP server. R6_E300(conf)#1w6d23h : NTP: xmit packet to 192.168.1.1: leap 0, mode 3, version 3, stratum 2, ppoll 1024 rtdel 0219 (8.193970), rtdsp AF928 (10973.266602), refid C0A80101 (192.168.1.1) ref CD7F4F63.6BE8F000 (14:51:15.421 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) org CD7F4F63.68000000 (14:51:15.
● Receive Timestamp — the arrival time on the client of the last NTP message from the server. If the server becomes unreachable, the value is set to zero. ● Transmit Timestamp — the departure time on the server of the current NTP message from the sender. ● Filter dispersion — the error in calculating the minimum delay from a set of sample data from a peer. To view the NTP configuration, use the show running-config ntp command in EXEC privilege mode.
○ time: enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; for example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm. ○ month: enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ year: enter a four-digit number as the year.
○ end-month: enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. ○ end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. ○ end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes.
The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring parameters.
55 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.2 tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any no shutdown Guidelines for Configuring Multipoint Receive-Only Tunnels ● You can configure up to eight remote end-points for a multipoint receive-only tunnel.
56 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at http://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
57 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
Figure 132. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 133. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
● If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5. (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. 6. (Optional) Disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode no enable The default is upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group.
02:38:53: Fo 3/48 02:38:53: Fo 3/52 02:38:53: Fo 3/56 02:38:53: Fo 3/60 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Downstream interface cleared from UFD error-disabled: %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTAT
Uplink State Group : 5 Status: Enabled, Down Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/1(Dwn) Te 1/3(Dwn) Te 1/5(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 3/2(Dis) Te 3/4(Dis) Te 3/11(Dis) Te 3/12(Dis) Te 3/13(Dis) Te 3/14(Dis) Te 3/15(Dis) Uplink State Group : 6 Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group : 7 Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group : 16 Status: Disabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/4(Dwn) Po 8(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : T
● ● ● ● ● Add downstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/1, 1/2, 1/5, 1/9, 1/11, and 1/12. Configure two downstream links to be disabled if an upstream link fails. Add upstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/3 and 1/4. Add a text description for the group. Verify the configuration with various show commands.
58 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. ● Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN. To remove an untagged interface from the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and place the interface into that VLAN.
● The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). ● Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total). The VLAN ID can have 4,096 values, but two are reserved. NOTE: The insertion of the tag header into the Ethernet frame increases the size of the frame to more than the 1,518 bytes as specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard. Some devices that are not compliant with IEEE 802.3 may not support the larger frame size.
Assigning Interfaces to a VLAN You can only assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to a VLAN using the tagged and untagged commands. To place an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. You can further designate these Layer 2 interfaces as tagged or untagged. For more information, see the Interfaces chapter and Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode.
When you remove a tagged interface from a VLAN (using the no tagged interface command), it remains tagged only if it is a tagged interface in another VLAN. If the tagged interface is removed from the only VLAN to which it belongs, the interface is placed in the Default VLAN as an untagged interface. Moving Untagged Interfaces To move untagged interfaces from the Default VLAN to another VLAN, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface.
Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN VLANs are a Layer 2 feature. For two physical interfaces on different VLANs to communicate, you must assign an IP address to the VLANs to route traffic between the two interfaces. The shutdown command in INTERFACE mode does not affect Layer 2 traffic on the interface; the shutdown command only prevents Layer 3 traffic from traversing over the interface. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN (VLAN 1).
Enabling Null VLAN as the Default VLAN In a Carrier Ethernet for Metro Service environment, service providers who perform frequent reconfigurations for customers with changing requirements occasionally enable multiple interfaces, each connected to a different customer, before the interfaces are fully configured. This presents a vulnerability because both interfaces are initially placed in the native VLAN, VLAN 1, and for that period customers are able to access each other's networks.
59 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time.
Figure 135. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the non-default VRF. Table 114. Software Features Supported on VRF Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF 802.
DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance. VRF Configuration The VRF configuration tasks are: 1. Enabling VRF in Configuration Mode 2. Creating a Non-Default VRF 3. Assign an Interface to a VRF You can also: ● View VRF Instance Information ● Connect an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance ● Configure VRRP on a VRF Loading VRF CAM ● Load CAM memory for the VRF feature.
INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip vrf forwarding management Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 3. Assign an IPv4 address to the interface. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ip address 10.1.1.1/24 Before assigning a front-end port to a management VRF, ensure that no IP address is configured on the interface. 4. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface.
Table 115. Configuring VRRP on a VRF (continued) Task Command Syntax Assign an IP address to the interface Configure the VRRP group and virtual IP address View VRRP command output for the VRF vrf1 Command Mode ip address 10.1.1.1 /24 no shutdown vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.100 show config ----------------------------! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/13 ip vrf forwarding vrf1 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 10 virtual-address 10.1.1.
● ● ● ● ● ● ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 nd reachable-time — Set advertised reachability time nd retrans-timer — Set NS retransmit interval used and advertised in RA nd suppress-ra — Suppress IPv6 Router Advertisements ad — IPv6 Address Detection ad autoconfig — IPv6 stateless auto-configuration address — Configure IPv6 address on an interface NOTE: The command line help still displays relevant details corresponding to each of these commands.
Figure 137. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.0/24 area 0 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.1 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 20.0.0.
! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.1 ! The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1.
Change Destination --------------------C 2.0.0.0/24 C 20.0.0.0/24 O 21.0.0.0/24 00:10:41 Gateway Dist/Metric ------- ----------- Direct, Vl 192 Direct, Te 1/2 via 2.0.0.
You can also leak global routes to be made available to VRFs. As the global RTM usually contains a large pool of routes, when the destination VRF imports global routes, these routes will be duplicated into the VRF's RTM. As a result, it is mandatory to use route-maps to filter out leaked routes while sharing global routes with VRFs. Configuring Route Leaking without Filtering Criteria You can use the ip route-export tag command to export all the IPv4 routes corresponding to a source VRF.
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-blue is created and the interface 1/12 is assigned to it. 7. Configure the import target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 1:1 8. Configure the export target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 3:3 9. Configure VRF-green. ip vrf vrf-green interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-green ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-green is created and the interface is assigned to it. 10.
Show routing tables of VRFs( after route-export and route-import tags are configured). DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O C O C 11.1.1.1/32 111.1.1.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 00:00:10 Direct, Te 1/11 0/0 22:39:59 via VRF-shared:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 Direct, VRF-shared:Te 1/4 0/0 00:32:36 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 C O C 122.2.2.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 110/0 00:00:11 Direct, Te 1/12 0/0 22:39:61 via vrf-shared:144.4.4.
Consider a scenario where you have created two VRF tables VRF-red and VRF-blue. VRF-red exports routes with the export_ospfbgp_protocol route-map to VRF-blue. VRF-blue imports these routes into its RTM. For leaking these routes from VRF-red to VRF-blue, you can use the ip route-export route-map command on VRF-red (source VRF, that is exporting the routes); you must also specify a match criteria for these routes using the match source-protocol command.
ip route-export 2:2 ip route-import 1:1 import_ospf_protocol !this action accepts only OSPF routes from VRF-red even though both OSPF as well as BGP routes are shared The show VRF commands displays the following output: DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, Te 1/22 0/0 O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 O 44.4.4.4/32 22:39:61 00:00:11 via vrf-red:144.4.4.
60 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) is a Dell EMC technology that provides two Dell EMC switches the ability to function as a single switch. VLT allows physical links between two Dell EMC switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices.
Figure 139. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
Figure 140. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. Eliminates STP-blocked ports. Provides a loop-free topology. Uses all available uplink bandwidth. Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). Provides link-level resiliency. Assures high availability. Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
● VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. ● VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces. ● VLT domain — This domain includes both the VLT peer devices, VLT interconnect, and all of the port channels in the VLT connected to the attached devices.
Viewing the MAC Synchronization Between VLT Peers You can use the following commands to verify the MAC synchronization between VLT peers: VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-address-table count MAC Entries for all vlans : Dynamic Address Count : 1007 Static Address (User-defined) Count : 1 Sticky Address Count : 0 Total Synced Mac from Peer(N): 503 Total MAC Addresses in Use: 1008 VLT-10-PEER-1#show vlt counter mac Total MAC VLT counters ---------------------L2 Total MAC-Address Count: 1007 VLT-10-PEER-1#show mac-addr
such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode. This example provides the highest form of resiliency, scaling, and load balancing in data center switching networks. The following example shows stacking at the access, VLT in aggregation, and Layer 3 at the core. Figure 142. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer.
Figure 143. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to Configure Rapid Spanning Tree. If you include PVST on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to PVST Configuration.
● When you enable Layer 3 routing protocols on VLT peers, make sure the delay-restore timer is set to a value that allows sufficient time for all routes to establish adjacency and exchange all the L3 routes between the VLT peers before you enable the VLT ports. ● Only use the lacp ungroup member-independent command if the system connects to nodes using bare metal provisioning (BMP) to upgrade or boot from the network.
○ The VLT interconnect synchronizes L2 and L3 control-plane information across the two chassis. ○ The VLT interconnect is used for data traffic only when there is a link failure that requires using VLTi in order for data packets to reach their final destination. ○ Unknown, multicast, and broadcast traffic can be flooded across the VLT interconnect. ○ MAC addresses for VLANs configured across VLT peer chassis are synchronized over the VLT interconnect on an egress port such as a VLT LAG.
For example, if the DHCP server is on the ToR and VLTi (ICL) is down (due to either an unavailable peer or a link failure), whether you configured the VLT LAG as static or LACP, when a single VLT peer is rebooted in BMP mode, it cannot reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure. Software features supported on VLT port-channels ○ In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on VLT port-channels: 802.
received), the VLT secondary switch disables its VLT port channels. If keepalive messages from the peer are not being received, the peer continues to forward traffic, assuming that it is the last device available in the network. In either case, after recovery of the peer link or reestablishment of message forwarding across the interconnect trunk, the two VLT peers resynchronize any MAC addresses learned while communication was interrupted and the VLT system continues normal data forwarding.
VLT and IGMP Snooping When configuring IGMP Snooping with VLT, ensure the configurations on both sides of the VLT trunk are identical to get the same behavior on both sides of the trunk. When you configure IGMP snooping on a VLT node, the dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are automatically learned on the VLT peer node. VLT IPv6 The following features have been enhanced to support IPv6: ● VLT Sync — Entries learned on the VLT interface are synced on both VLT peers.
Figure 144. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
If the VLT node elected as the designated router fails and you enable VLT Multicast Routing, multicast routes are synced to the other peer for traffic forwarding to ensure minimal traffic loss. If you did not enable VLT Multicast Routing, traffic loss occurs until the other VLT peer is selected as the DR. VLT Routing VLT Routing refers to the ability to run a dynamic routing protocol within a single VLT domain or between VLT domains (mVLT).
If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 146. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing ● ● Avoids sub-optimal routing ● Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
Configuring VLT Unicast To enable and configure VLT unicast, follow these steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2. Enable peer-routing. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3. Configure the peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 65535.
peer-routing 3. Configure the multicast peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode multicast peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 1200. 4. Configure a PIM-SM compatible VLT node as a designated router (DR). For more information, refer to Configuring a Designated Router. 5. Configure a PIM-enabled external neighboring router as a rendezvous point (RP). For more information, refer to Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point. 6.
Sample RSTP Configuration The following is a sample of an RSTP configuration. Using the example shown in the Overview section as a sample VLT topology, the primary VLT switch sends BPDUs to an access device (switch or server) with its own RSTP bridge ID. BPDUs generated by an RSTP-enabled access device are only processed by the primary VLT switch. The secondary VLT switch tunnels the BPDUs that it receives to the primary VLT switch over the VLT interconnect.
NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2. Remove any IP address from the interface if already present. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3. Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
6. (Optional) Prevent a possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | port-channel port-channel-id} LACP on VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the virtual link trunk, is not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device. 7.
If the primary peer fails, the secondary peer (with the higher priority) takes the primary role. If the primary peer (with the lower priority) later comes back online, it is assigned the secondary role (there is no preemption). 3. (Optional) When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically creates a VLT-system MAC address used for internal system operations.
To configure the VLAN where a VLT peer forwards received packets over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peer-down-vlan parameter. When a VLT peer with BMP reboots, untagged DHCP discover packets are sent to the peer over the VLTi. Using this configuration ensures the DHCP discover packets are forwarded to the VLAN that has the DHCP server. Configuring a VLT VLAN Peer-Down (Optional) To configure a VLT VLAN peer-down, use the following commands. 1.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode system-mac mac-address mac-address The format is aaaa.bbbb.cccc. Also reconfigure the same MAC address on the VLT peer switch. Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to synchronize the default MAC address of the VLT domain on both peer switches when one peer switch reboots. 7. When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch.
VLT Sample Configuration To review a sample VLT configuration setup, study these steps. 1. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. VLT DOMAIN mode vlt domain domain id 2. Configure the VLTi between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3. You can configure LACP/static LAG between the peer units (not shown).
1. You can configure the LACP/static LAG between the peer units (not shown). 2. Configure the peer-link port-channel in the VLT domains of each peer unit. Dell-2(conf)#interface port-channel Dell-2(conf-if-po-1)#channel-member Dell-4(conf)#interface port-channel Dell-4(conf-if-po-1)#channel-member 1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/4-7 1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/4-7 Configure the backup link between the VLT peer units. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 100 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 03:33:48 Ports Te 1/8 (Up) Te 1/30 (Up) Verify VLT is up. Verify that the VLTi (ICL) link, backup link connectivity (heartbeat status), and VLT peer link (peer chassis) are all up.
Configure PVST+ on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 1) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-pvst)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-pvst)#vlan 1000 bridge-priority 0 Configure PVST+ on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 2) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-pvst)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-pvst)#vlan 1000 bridge-priority 4096 Configure both ends of the VLT interconnect trunk with identical PVST+ configurations.
Figure 147. Peer Routing Configuration Example Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. DellEMC#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
(The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi. DellEMC#1#sh run int te0/0 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 description VLTi LINK no ip address no shutdown (VLTi Physical link) ! DellEMC#1#sh run int te0/1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 description VLTi LINK no ip address no shutdown (VLTi Physical link) The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10.
Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.1/29 untagged Port-channel 1 no shutdown ! DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 800 interface Vlan 800 description Client-VLAN ip address 192.168.8.1/24 tagged Port-channel 2 no shutdown The following output shows Dell-1 is configured with VLT domain 1.
Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed. DellEMC#1#sh vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------1 2 Peer LAG Id ----------1 2 Local Status -----------UP UP Peer Status ----------UP UP Active VLANs ------------20 1, 800, 900 The following output displays the OSPF configuration in Dell-1 DellEMC#1#sh run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.17.1.1 network 192.168.9.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.8.0/24 area 0 network 172.17.1.
0 0 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f3 LOCAL_DA LOCAL_DA 00001 00001A The above output shows that the 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd MAC address belongs to Dell-1. The 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f3 MAC address belongs to Dell-2. Also note that these MAC addresses are marked with LOCAL_DA. This means, these are the local destination MAC addresses used by hosts when routing is required. Packets sent to this MAC address are directly forwarded to their destinations without being sent to the peer switch.
no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 2 mode active no shutdown Te 0/6 connects to the uplink switch R1. Dell-2#sh run int te0/6 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/6 description To_CR1_fa0/13 no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 1 mode active no shutdown Port channel 1 connects the uplink switch R1.
Verify if VLT on Dell-1 is functional Dell-2#sh vlt brief VLT Domain Brief -----------------Domain ID: Role: Role Priority: 1 Secondary 55000 ICL Link Status: HeartBeat Status: VLT Peer Status: Local Unit Id: Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Peer routing : Peer routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer routing timeout: Up Up Up 1 6(3) 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f1 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bb 90:b1:1c:f4:01:01 6(3) 90 seconds En
The following output displays the routes learned using OSPF. Dell-2 also learns the routes to the loopback addresses on R1 through OSPF. Dell-2#show ip route ospf Destination Gateway ----------------O 2.2.2.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 3.3.3.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 4.4.4.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 172.15.1.1/32 via 192.168.20.3, O 172.16.1.2/32 via 192.168.20.
network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 192.168.20.0 0.0.0.7 area 0 CR1#show ip ospf neighbor (R1 is a DROTHER) Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 172.16.1.2 1 FULL/BDR 00:00:31 192.168.20.2 Port-channel1 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 00:00:38 192.168.20.1 Port-channel1 CR1#show ip route (Output Truncated) 2.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets C 2.2.2.0 is directly connected, Loopback2 3.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets C 3.3.3.0 is directly connected, Loopback3 O 192.168.8.0/24 [110/2] via 192.168.
Figure 148. eVLT Configuration Example eVLT Configuration Step Examples In Domain 1, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1#configure Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/8-9 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#vlt domain 1000 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.
Configure eVLT on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 2.
PIM-Sparse Mode Configuration Example The following sample configuration shows how to configure the PIM Sparse mode designated router functionality on the VLT domain with two VLT port-channels that are members of VLAN 4001. For more information, refer to PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT. Examples of Configuring PIM-Sparse Mode The following example shows how to enable PIM multicast routing on the VLT node globally.
show vlt role ● Display the current configuration of all VLT domains or a specified group on the switch. EXEC mode show running-config vlt ● Display statistics on VLT operation. EXEC mode show vlt statistics ● Display the RSTP configuration on a VLT peer switch, including the status of port channels used in the VLT interconnect trunk and to connect to access devices. EXEC mode show spanning-tree rstp ● Display the current status of a port or port-channel interface used in the VLT domain.
Multicast peer-routing timeout DellEMC# : 150 seconds The following example shows the show vlt detail command.
HeartBeat Messages Received: 978 ICL Hello's Sent: 89 ICL Hello's Received: 89 The following example shows the show spanning-tree rstp command. The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt).
Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-0/0)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-0/0)#exit Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#no ip address Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#channel-member fortyGigE 1/48,52 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#exit Configure the port channel to an attached device.
Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN.
Table 116. Troubleshooting VLT (continued) Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Spanning tree mismatch at port level A syslog error message is generated. A one-time informational syslog message is generated. Correct the spanning tree configuration on the ports. System MAC mismatch A syslog error message and an A syslog error message and an Verify that the unit ID of VLT SNMP trap are generated. SNMP trap are generated.
● Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. ● You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted When the VLT peer node is rebooted, the VLAN membership of the VLTi link is preserved and when the peer node comes back online, a verification is performed with the newly received PVLAN configuration from the peer. If any differences are identified, the VLTi link is either added or removed from the VLAN. When the peer node restarts and returns online, all the PVLAN configurations are exchanged across the peers.
Table 117.
Creating a VLT LAG or a VLT VLAN 1. Configure the port channel for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number. Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2. Remove an IP address from the interface.
● promiscuous (intra-VLAN communication port) ● trunk (inter-switch PVLAN hub port) 5. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN to which you want to assign the PVLAN interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 6. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 7. To obtain maximum VLT resiliency, configure the PVLAN IDs and mappings to be identical on both the VLT peer nodes. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 8.
Proxy ARP is supported for both unicast and broadcast ARP requests. Control packets, other than ARP requests destined for the VLT peers that reach the undesired and incorrect VLT node, are dropped if the ICL link is down. Further processing is not done on these control packets. The VLT node does not perform any action if it receives gratuitous ARP requests for the VLT peer IP address. Proxy ARP is also supported on secondary VLANs.
Configuring VLAN-Stack over VLT To configure VLAN-stack over VLT, follow these steps. 1. Configure the VLT LAG as VLAN-Stack access or Trunk mode on both the peers. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2. Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3. Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4. Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown DellEMC# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 50 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-sta
interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown DellEMC# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as members to the VLAN DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 50 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)# DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-
Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a VLT Domain Because the VLT nodes appear as a single unit, the ND entries learned via the VLT interface are expected to be the same on both VLT nodes. VLT V6 VLAN and neighbor discovery protocol monitor (NDPM) entries synchronization between VLT nodes is performed. The VLT V6 VLAN information must synchronize with peer VLT node. Therefore, both the VLT nodes are aware of the VLT VLAN information associated with the peers.
Figure 149. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL. When VLT node 1 receives NS on ICL, it floods the NA packet on the VLAN. If NS is unicast and if it reaches the wrong VLT peer, it is lifted to the CPU using ACL entry.
When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to VLT host, it routes the traffic to VLT interface. If VLT interface is not operationally up VLT node will route the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to North Bound traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to north bound with DMAC as self MAC it routes traffic to next hop.
61 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 151. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: ● Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. ● You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
● Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported. ● When a Virtual Machine (VM) moves from one VLT domain to the another VLT domain, the VM host sends the gratuitous ARP (GARP) , which in-turn triggers a mac movement from the previous VLT domain to the newer VLT domain. ● After a station move, if the host sends a TTL1 packet destined to its gateway; for example, a previous VLT node, the packet can be dropped.
● You cannot have interface–level LLDP disable commands on the interfaces configured for proxy gateway and you must enable both transmission and reception. ● You must connect both units of the remote VLT domain by the port channel member. ● If you connect more than one port to a unit of the remote VLT domain, the connection must be completed by the time you enable the proxy gateway LLDP. ● You cannot have other conflicting configurations (for example, you cannot have a static proxy gateway configuration).
For VLT Proxy Gateway to work in this scenario you must configure the VLT-peer-mac transmit command under VLT Domain Proxy Gateway LLDP mode, in both C and D (VLT domain 1) and C1 and D1 (VLT domain 2). This behavior is applicable only in the LLDP configuration and not required in the static configuration.
Sample Dynamic Proxy Configuration on C switch or C1 switch Switch_C#conf Switch_C(conf)#vlt domain 1 Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1)#proxy-gateway lldp Switch_C(conf-vlt-domain1-pxy-gw-lldp)#peer-domain-link port-channel 1.... VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT proxy gateway enables one VLT domain to act as proxy gateway for another VLT domain when a host or virtual machine is moved from one VLT domain to the other VLT domain.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/9 description "To DELL-3 10Gb" no ip address ! port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 50 mode active no shutdown interface Port-channel 50 description "mVLT port channel to DELL-3" no ip address switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used.
The MAC addresses, configured using the remote-mac-address command, belong to Dell-3 and Dell-4. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF peering VLAN to Dell-1 ip address 10.10.100.2/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-2. router ospf 1 router-id 2.2.2.2 network 10.10.100.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.
ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown The following is the OSPF configuration on Dell-3. router ospf 1 router-id 3.3.3.3 network 10.10.101.0/30 area 0 network 10.10.102.0/30 area 0 The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.
62 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. Topics: • • • • • VRRP Overview VRRP Benefits VRRP Implementation VRRP Configuration Sample Configurations VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 154. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 118.
The following examples how to configure VRRP. DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
3. Set the backup switches to version 3. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-100)#version 3 Assign Virtual IP addresses Virtual routers contain virtual IP addresses configured for that VRRP group (VRID). A VRRP group does not transmit VRRP packets until you assign the Virtual IP address to the VRRP group. For more information, refer to VRRP Implementation.
virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 ! vrrp-group 222 no shutdown The following example shows the same VRRP group (VRID 111) configured on multiple interfaces on different subnets. DellEMC#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Version: 2 Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
Virtual IP address: 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/2, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.2.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 125, Master: 10.10.2.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 601, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.
● Prevent any BACKUP router with a higher priority from becoming the MASTER router. INTERFACE-VRID mode no preempt Re-enable preempt by entering the preempt command. When you enable preempt, it does not display in the show commands, because it is a default setting. The following example shows how to disable preempt using the no preempt command.
The following example shows how to change the advertise interval using the advertise-interval command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#advertise-interval 10 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# The following example shows how to verify the advertise interval change using the show conf command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 advertise-interval 10 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 virtual-address 10.10.10.
● (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked objects, including the client (VRRP group) that is tracking an object’s state. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show track ● (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked interfaces and objects in VRRP groups, including the time since the last change in an object’s state.
2007::1 fe80::1 Tracking states for 2 resource Ids: 2 - Up IPv6 route, 2040::/64, priority-cost 20, 00:02:11 3 - Up IPv6 route, 2050::/64, priority-cost 30, 00:02:11 The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface.
support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. The VRRP topology was created using the CLI configuration shown in the following example. Figure 155. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.
R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 2/31, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.1.1.
Figure 156. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 135 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP addre
Both Switch-1 and Switch-2 have three VRF instances defined: VRF-1, VRF-2, and VRF-3. Each VRF has a separate physical interface to a LAN switch and an upstream VPN interface to connect to the Internet. Both Switch-1 and Switch-2 use VRRP groups on each VRF instance in order that there is one MASTER and one backup router for each VRF. In VRF-1 and VRF-2, Switch-2 serves as owner-master of the VRRP group and Switch-1 serves as the backup. On VRF-3, Switch-1 is the owner-master and Switch-2 is the backup.
% Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 2 will be 178. S1(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-101)#priority 100 S1(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.2 S1(conf-if-te-1/2)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
VLAN Scenario In another scenario, to connect to the LAN, VRF-1, VRF-2, and VRF-3 use a single physical interface with multiple tagged VLANs (instead of separate physical interfaces). In this case, you configure three VLANs: VLAN-100, VLAN-200, and VLAN-300. Each VLAN is a member of one VRF. A physical interface (tengigabitethernet 1/1 ) attaches to the LAN and is configured as a tagged interface in VLAN-100, VLAN-200, and VLAN-300. The rest of this example is similar to the non-VLAN scenario.
Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 20.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
63 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 119.
Table 119. General Internet Protocols (continued) R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 6 0 Transfer Protocol 2 4 7 4 Definition of 7.7.1 the Differentiate d Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 PPP over 61 SONET/SD 5 H 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 6 9 8 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Table 120. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) (continued) RFC# Full Name SSeries/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048TON S6010–ON for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2842 Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2858 Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Table 121. General IPv4 Protocols (continued) RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1191 Path MTU Discovery 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 130 Network Time Protocol 5 (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and Analysis 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 151 9 Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR): an Address Assignment and Aggregation Strategy 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.
Table 122. General IPv6 Protocols (continued) RFC Full Name # S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 267 5 IPv6 Jumbograms 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 358 7 IPv6 Global Unicast Address Format 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 400 7 IPv6 Scoped Address Architecture 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.
Table 123. Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) (continued) RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) 5120 MT-ISIS: Multi Topology (MT) Routing in Intermediate System to Intermediate Systems (ISISs) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 5306 Restart Signaling for IS-IS 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 5308 Routing IPv6 with IS-IS 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.
Table 124. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 2012 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2013 SNMPv2 Management 7.6.1 Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2024 Definitions of Managed Objects 7.6.1 for Data Link Switching using SMIv2 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
Table 124. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes radiusAuthClientPacketsDroppe d 2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker 9.5.(0.0) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3635 Definitions of Managed Objects 7.6.1 for the Ethernet-like Interface Types 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects 7.6.
Table 124. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 4750 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 9.5.(0.0) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 4502 RMON v2 MIB 9.5(0.0) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 5060 Protocol Independent Multicast 7.8.1 MIB 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) ANSI/ TIA-10 57 The LLDP Management 7.7.1 Information Base extension module for TIA-TR41.
Table 124. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name ruzinmstpmib-0 2 (Traps ) S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Definitions of Managed Objects 7.6.1 for Bridges with Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) sFlow. org sFlow Version 5 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) sFlow. org sFlow Version 5 MIB 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 124. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON FORC Force10 Monitoring MIB E10MONM IB 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORC Force10 Product Object E10Identifier MIB PROD UCTSMIB 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORC E10SSCHAS SISMIB Force10 S-Series Enterprise Chassis MIB 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
Table 125. Multicast (continued) RFC# Full Name S-Series 3618 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) draftietf-pim -sm-v2new- 05 Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode (PIM-SM): Protocol Specification (Revised) S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 7.8.1 PIM-SM 9.8(0.0P2) for IPv4 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.aspx You also can obtain a list of selected MIBs and their OIDs at the following URL: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/Login.aspx Some pages of iSupport require a login. To request an iSupport account, go to: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/AccountRequest/AccountRequest.
64 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.509v3 support in Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.
Advantages of X.509v3 certificates Public key authentication is preferred over password-based authentication, although both may be used in conjunction, for various reasons. Public-key authentication provides the following advantages over normal password-based authentication: ● Public-key authentication avoids the human problems of low-entropy password selection and provides more resistance to brute-force attacks than password-based authentication.
The other hosts on the network, such as the SUT switch, syslog server, and OCSP server, generate private keys and create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs). The hosts then upload the CSRs to the Intermediate CA or make the CSRs available for the Intermediate CA to download. generates a CSR using the crypto cert generate request command. The hosts on the network (SUT, syslog, OCSP…) also download and install the CA certificates from the Root and Intermediate CAs.
After the CA certificate is installed, the system can secure communications with TLS servers by verifying certificates that are signed by the CA. Installing CA certificate To install a CA certificate, enter the crypto ca-cert install {path} command in Global Configuration mode. Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.
● ● ● ● ● Common Name Email address Validity Length Alternate Name NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS.
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic.
Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional. The default behavior is to not use these two options.
Verifying Client Certificates Verifying client certificates is optional in the TLS protocol and is not explicitly required by Common Criteria. However, TLS-protected Syslog and RADIUS protocols mandate that certificate-based mutual authentication be performed. Event logging The system logs the following events: ● A CA certificate is installed or deleted. ● A self-signed certificate and private key are generated. ● An existing host certificate, a private key, or both are deleted.
